WO2023207970A1 - 通信方法及通信装置 - Google Patents
通信方法及通信装置 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2023207970A1 WO2023207970A1 PCT/CN2023/090571 CN2023090571W WO2023207970A1 WO 2023207970 A1 WO2023207970 A1 WO 2023207970A1 CN 2023090571 W CN2023090571 W CN 2023090571W WO 2023207970 A1 WO2023207970 A1 WO 2023207970A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- monitored
- network status
- transport layer
- service flow
- status information
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 452
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 165
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 54
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 claims description 113
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 claims description 95
- 102100023600 Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 Human genes 0.000 claims description 82
- 101000827688 Homo sapiens Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 Proteins 0.000 claims description 82
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 claims description 79
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 claims description 48
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 claims description 15
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 claims description 5
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 claims description 3
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 53
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 46
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 19
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 6
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000013523 data management Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000010295 mobile communication Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000008713 feedback mechanism Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000005641 tunneling Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000011144 upstream manufacturing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 101150119040 Nsmf gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000013473 artificial intelligence Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013475 authorization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006399 behavior Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007405 data analysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000013500 data storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000006731 degradation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004069 differentiation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012634 fragment Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007774 longterm Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010801 machine learning Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001960 triggered effect Effects 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
- H04L69/00—Network arrangements, protocols or services independent of the application payload and not provided for in the other groups of this subclass
- H04L69/06—Notations for structuring of protocol data, e.g. abstract syntax notation one [ASN.1]
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
- H04W28/00—Network traffic management; Network resource management
- H04W28/02—Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
- H04W28/06—Optimizing the usage of the radio link, e.g. header compression, information sizing, discarding information
Definitions
- the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication, and more specifically, to a communication method and a communication device.
- the third-party application can sense the network status in real time, the third-party application can make corresponding adjustments according to the network status, thereby ensuring the user's business experience and maximizing network utilization efficiency.
- the application side needs to adjust the bit rate in real time according to the network status to avoid degradation of user experience caused by network status changes. Therefore, how to quickly expose more network status information, such as available bandwidth, congestion conditions, etc., to third-party application servers is a key issue, especially for real-time services such as extended reality (XR) and cloud games.
- XR extended reality
- the radio access network can monitor the network congestion status of the air interface between the RAN and the user equipment (UE), and through the Internet protocol (internet protocol) in the downlink data packet,
- the IP) header carries an explicit congestion notification (ECN) mark to expose the network status information between the RAN and the UE.
- ECN explicit congestion notification
- the RAN carries the ECN mark in the IP header of the downlink data packet and sends the downlink data packet to the UE.
- the UE counts the number of downlink data packets carrying the ECN mark in at least one received downlink data packet and/or the number of payload bits of the downlink data packet carrying the ECN mark, and sends the statistical results to the application server side through the transport layer feedback mechanism. This allows third-party applications to obtain network status.
- the third-party application server cannot quickly obtain the network status.
- the RAN since the RAN is located closer to the user side than the core network elements and has the possibility of being physically damaged, the RAN parses the IP layer of the downlink data packet and carries the ECN mark in the IP header of the downlink data packet. There will be certain safety risks.
- the RAN sends the network status information to the UE side, and then the UE side sends it to the application server side. Longer transmission links cannot guarantee the rapid and real-time opening of the network status information.
- Embodiments of the present application provide a communication method in order to optimize the way in which network status information is fed back to the application server through the transport layer.
- a communication method includes: a user plane network element obtains network status information of a service flow to be monitored; the user plane network element receives a first transmission layer feedback message from a terminal device.
- the first transmission layer The layer feedback message corresponds to at least one data packet in the service flow to be monitored; the user plane network element responds to the first transport layer feedback message
- a second transport layer feedback message is sent to the application server, where the second transport layer feedback message includes information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the user plane network element obtains the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, and after receiving the first transport layer feedback message from the terminal device, sends the second transport layer feedback to the application server according to the first transport layer feedback message.
- the second transport layer feedback message includes information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored, so that the application server can determine the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on the second transport layer feedback message.
- the access network device can send the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to the user plane network element, and then the user plane network element opens it to the application server through the transport layer.
- the access network equipment opens network status information by adding an explicit congestion notification (ECN) mark to the Internet Protocol (IP) layer header of uplink/downlink data packets, since there is no need for an access network
- ECN explicit congestion notification
- IP Internet Protocol
- the device parses the IP layer header of downstream packets, so security is higher.
- the network status information does not need to be sent to the terminal device, and then the terminal device sends it to the application server side, which can realize faster feedback of the network status information.
- the second transport layer feedback message sent by the user plane network element to the application server includes information indicating network status. Therefore, without considering the capabilities of the terminal device, the method provided by the embodiments of the present application can also realize opening the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to the application server through the transport layer. This avoids the problem that when the terminal device does not support the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, it cannot open the network status information of the business flow to be monitored to the application server, so that the application cannot dynamically adjust it, thus affecting the user experience.
- the user plane network element sends the second transport layer feedback message to the application server according to the first transport layer feedback message, including: the user plane network element adds a message indicating the service flow to be monitored in the first transport layer feedback message.
- the network status information generates a second transport layer feedback message; or, the user plane network element generates a second transport layer feedback message by modifying the values of some fields in the first transport layer feedback message.
- the source addresses of the first transport layer feedback message and the second transport layer feedback message are the same, that is, the source addresses of the first transport layer feedback message and the second transport layer feedback message are both addresses of the terminal device.
- the user plane network element Based on the above technical solution, the user plane network element generates a second transport layer feedback message by adding information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored in the first transport layer feedback message, or by modifying part of the first transport layer feedback message.
- the value of the field generates a second transport layer feedback message, so that the second transport layer feedback message includes information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored, which is equivalent to the user plane network element assisting the terminal device to open to the application server through the transport layer.
- Monitor the network status information of the business flow so that without considering the terminal device capabilities, according to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, it is also possible to open the network status information of the business flow to be monitored to the application server through the transport layer.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
- TCP Transmission Control Protocol
- the information used to indicate the network status information of the service flow to be monitored includes at least one of the following: carrying congestion experience The number of packets marked by congestion experienced (CE), the number of payload bits of packets carrying CE marking, the number of payload bits of packets carrying ECN capable transport (ECT)1 marking, or the number of payload bits carrying ECT0 The number of payload bits of the tagged packet.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is a quick user datagram protocol (UDP) Internet connection (QUIC) protocol, which is used to indicate the service flow to be monitored.
- the information of the network information includes at least one of the following: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, The number of data packets with ECT1 tag, or the number of data packets with ECT0 tag.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is a real-time transport protocol (real-time transport protocol, RTP) or a real-time transport control protocol (real-time transport control protocol, RTCP), which is used to determine the service flow to be monitored.
- the information of monitoring the network information of the service flow includes at least one of the following: the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark, the number of data packets carrying the ECT0 mark, the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of lost packets, and duplicate received data. The number of packets, or the number of data packets that do not carry the ECN mark.
- the method further includes: the user plane network element based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored and based on the ECN mark (ECN mark) of the at least one data packet, or ECN lable), generate the information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- ECN mark ECN mark
- the method further includes: the user plane network element receiving the at least one data packet from the application server; and the user plane network element determining the at least one data packet. ECN mark. That is, the user plane network element receives at least one data packet from the application server and counts the ECN mark of the at least one data packet.
- the method further includes: the user plane network element obtains the ECN mark of the at least one data packet from the first transport layer feedback message.
- the terminal device can count the ECN mark of at least one data packet and add it to the first transport layer feedback message.
- the ECN mark of at least one data packet enables the user plane network element to obtain the ECN mark of at least one data packet.
- the method further includes: the user plane network element receiving a first transport layer data packet from the terminal device, the first transport layer data packet being connected to the to-be-monitored The service flow corresponds; the user plane network element sends a second transport layer data packet to the application server according to the first transport layer data packet, and the second transport layer data packet includes an indication indicating that feedback of network status information through the transport layer is supported. information.
- the user plane network element sends the second transport layer data packet to the application server according to the first transport layer data packet, so that the application server can determine based on the indication information included in the second transport layer data packet that the terminal device supports the transmission layer Network status information is fed back, so that after the application server receives the second transport layer feedback message, it can determine that the second transport layer feedback message includes information indicating the network status.
- the method further includes: the user plane network element determining that the first transport layer data packet includes information indicating that feedback of network status information through the transport layer is not supported.
- the user plane network element when the user plane network element determines that the first transport layer data packet includes information that does not support feedback of network status information through the transport layer, the user plane network element sends a second transmission to the application server based on the first transport layer data packet.
- Layer data packets can reduce resource consumption of user plane network elements. For example, if the first transport layer data packet includes information that supports feedback of network status information through the transport layer, the user plane network element can directly send the first transport layer data packet to the application server without having to send the first transport layer data packet to the application server based on the first transport layer data packet. The application server sends the second transport layer data packet.
- the method further includes: the user plane network element receives a TCP connection establishment message from the terminal; the user plane network element responds to the TCP header of the TCP connection establishment message.
- the value of the three bits of accurate ECN (accurate ECN, AE), congestion window reduced bit (congestion window reduced, CWR) and ECN echo bit (ECE) in the part determines whether the terminal device supports passing through the transport layer. The ability to expose network status information.
- the user plane network element determines that the terminal device supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer. On the contrary, the user plane network element determines that the terminal device does not support the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- the method further includes: the user plane network element receiving the data packet from the terminal device; the user plane network element based on the ECN of the IP header of the data packet.
- the value of the field determines whether the terminal device supports the ability to expose network status information through the transport layer.
- the user plane network element determines that the terminal device supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, and vice versa. , the user plane network element determines that the terminal device does not support the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- the method further includes: the user plane network element receiving uplink session description protocol information from the terminal device; the user plane network element based on the uplink session description protocol information, Determine whether the end device supports the ability to expose network state information through the transport layer.
- the user plane network element determines that the terminal device does not support the ability to open network status information through the transport layer. On the contrary, the user plane network element determines that the terminal device does not support the ability to open network status information through the transport layer. Supports the ability to expose network state information through the transport layer.
- the method further includes: when the application server supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, the user plane network element determines the service to be monitored according to the service to be monitored.
- the network status information of the flow generates information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the method further includes: the user plane network element receiving a TCP connection establishment message from the application server; and the user plane network element receiving a TCP connection establishment message based on the TCP connection establishment message.
- the values of the three bits AE, CWR and ECE in the header determine the application server's ability to support opening network status information through the transport layer.
- the user plane network element can generate information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored and send the second transmission to the application server after determining that the application server supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- Layer feedback messages can avoid unnecessary resource consumption. For example, if the user plane network element determines that the application server does not support the ability to expose network status information through the transport layer, the user plane network element will not generate information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored, nor will it send it to the application server. The second transport layer feedback message.
- the user plane network element make sure the application server supports exposing network state information through the transport layer.
- the method further includes: the user plane network element receiving the data packet from the application server; the user plane network element based on the ECN of the IP header of the data packet.
- the value of the field determines the application server's ability to support opening network status information through the transport layer.
- the user plane network element can generate information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored and send the second transmission to the application server after determining that the application server supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- Layer feedback messages can avoid unnecessary resource consumption. For example, if the user plane network element determines that the application server does not support the ability to expose network status information through the transport layer, the user plane network element will not generate information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored, nor will it send it to the application server. The second transport layer feedback message.
- the user plane network element determines that the application server supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- the method further includes: the user plane network element receiving downlink session description protocol information from the application server; the user plane network element based on the downlink session description protocol information, Determine the application server's ability to support exposing network state information through the transport layer.
- the user plane network element can generate information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored and send the second transmission to the application server after determining that the application server supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- Layer feedback messages can avoid unnecessary resource consumption. For example, if the user plane network element determines that the application server does not support the ability to expose network status information through the transport layer, the user plane network element will not generate information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored, nor will it send it to the application server. The second transport layer feedback message.
- the user plane network element determines the application server's ability to support opening network status information through the transport layer.
- the method further includes: the user plane network element receiving a network status information opening rule from the session management network element, and the network status information opening rule is used to determine whether the The layer exposes the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the network status information opening rules include one or more of the following: indication information used to indicate intervention in the transport layer capability negotiation process between the terminal device and the application server, transmission information used to indicate the use of the service flow to be monitored Instruction information of the layer protocol, a method of receiving network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the access network device, a method of detecting the first transport layer feedback message, or adding an indication in the first transport layer feedback message
- the transport layer capability negotiation process is used to determine whether feedback of network status information through the transport layer is supported.
- a communication method which method includes: the policy control function network element receives indication information from the application function network element for instructing the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to be opened to the outside through the transport layer; the policy control function network element The functional network element determines a monitoring strategy and a network status information opening strategy for the service flow to be monitored based on the instruction information for instructing the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to be opened through the transport layer.
- the monitoring strategy is used to determine the service flow to be monitored.
- the monitoring configuration information is used to monitor the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the network status information opening policy is used to determine the network status information opening rules.
- the network status information opening rules are used to determine the opening of the network status information through the transport layer.
- the method of network status information of the service flow to be monitored; the policy control function network element sends the monitoring policy and the network status information opening policy to the session management network element.
- the policy control function network element determines the monitoring strategy and the network status information opening strategy, and The monitoring policy and network status information opening policy are sent to the session management network element, so that the session management network element can send monitoring configuration information to the access network device according to the monitoring policy, and send network status information to the user plane network element according to the network status information opening policy.
- Open rules so that the access network equipment can send the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to the user plane network element according to the monitoring configuration information, and the user plane network element determines to open the service to be monitored to the application server through the transport layer according to the network status information opening rules Network status information for the flow.
- the network status information opening policy or the network status information opening rule includes one or more of the following: instruction information used to instruct intervention in the transport layer capability negotiation process between the terminal device and the application server, instruction information used to instruct the Indicative information of the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored, a method of receiving network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the access network device, a method of detecting a transport layer feedback message from the terminal device, and feedback messages at the transport layer A way to add information indicating the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, or to indicate that the service flow to be monitored is based on
- the network status information of the flow adds CE mark indication information in at least one data packet
- the transport layer capability negotiation process includes a process of determining whether the ability to feed back network status information through the transport layer is supported.
- the method further includes: the policy control function network element receiving a transport layer capability from the application function network element indicating the intervention of the terminal device and the application server. Instructions for the negotiation process.
- the method further includes: the policy control function network element receiving an indication from the application function network element for indicating the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored. information.
- a communication method which method includes: the session management network element receives the monitoring policy and the network status information opening policy of the service flow to be monitored from the policy control function network element; the session management network element receives the monitoring policy and the network status information opening policy from the policy control function network element; The information opening policy sends network status information opening rules to the user plane network element.
- the network status information opening rules are used to determine the way to open the network status information of the service flow to be monitored through the transport layer; the session management network element sends the network status information opening rules to the user plane network element according to the monitoring policy.
- the access network device sends monitoring configuration information of the service flow to be monitored, and the monitoring configuration information is used to monitor the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the session management network element can send monitoring configuration information to the access network device according to the monitoring policy, and send monitoring configuration information to the user plane according to the network status information opening policy.
- the network element sends the network status information opening rules, so that the access network equipment can send the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to the user plane network element according to the monitoring configuration information, and the user plane network element determines to pass the transport layer to the network status information opening rules according to the network status information opening rules.
- the application server opens the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the network status information opening policy or the network status information opening rule includes one or more of the following: instruction information used to instruct intervention in the transport layer capability negotiation process between the terminal device and the application server, instruction information used to instruct the Indicative information of the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored, a method of receiving network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the access network device, a method of detecting a transport layer feedback message from the terminal device, and feedback messages at the transport layer A method of adding information indicating the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, or indication information indicating adding a CE mark to at least one data packet according to the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, the transport layer capability
- the negotiation process includes the process of determining whether the ability to feed back network status information through the transport layer is supported.
- a fourth aspect provides a communication method, which method includes: the application server sends to the policy control function network element indication information for instructing the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to be opened to the outside through the transport layer; the application server sends the to-be-monitored service flow. Monitor at least one data packet in the service flow; the application server receives a second transport layer feedback message from the user plane network element, the second transport layer feedback message corresponds to the at least one data packet, and the second transport layer feedback message includes Information used to indicate the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the second transport layer feedback message received by the application server includes information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the second transport layer feedback message is generated based on the first transport layer feedback message sent by the terminal device. Therefore,
- the application server may determine the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on the second transport layer feedback message. This allows the application server to adjust the service parameters of the service flow to be monitored according to the network status of the service flow to be monitored, such as adjusting the media code rate accordingly to ensure the user's business experience and improve the effective utilization of network resources.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is TCP
- the information used to indicate the network status information of the service flow to be monitored includes at least one of the following: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of data packets carrying the CE mark The number of payload bits of the data packet, the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the ECT1 tag, or the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the ECT0 tag.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is the QUIC protocol
- the information used to indicate the network information of the service flow to be monitored includes at least one of the following: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 The number of marked packets, or the number of packets carrying the ECT0 mark.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is RTP/RTCP
- the information used to determine the network information of the service flow to be monitored includes one or more of the following: the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark , the number of data packets carrying the ECT0 mark, the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of lost packets, the number of duplicately received data packets, or the number of data packets not carrying the ECN mark.
- the method further includes: the application server sending to the policy control function network element a message indicating intervention in the transport layer capability negotiation process between the terminal device and the application server.
- Indication information the transport layer capability negotiation process includes a process of determining whether to support the ability to feed back network status information through the transport layer.
- the application server sends instruction information for instructing to intervene in the transport layer capability negotiation process between the terminal device and the application server to the policy control function network element, so that the policy control function network element sends network status information to the session management network element.
- the opening policy may include the above instruction information, and the network status information opening rules sent by the session management network element to the user plane network element may also include the above instruction information, so that the user plane network element can intervene in the transport layer of the terminal device and the application server based on the above instruction information. Capability negotiation process.
- the user plane network element when the terminal device does not support the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, the user plane network element sends indication information to the application server on behalf of the terminal device to indicate that it supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, so that it can Realize opening the network status information of the business flow to be monitored to the application server through the transport layer.
- the user plane network element monitors the capability negotiation messages between the terminal device and the application server to confirm that the terminal device does not support the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, and will modify the capability information on the terminal device side to replace the terminal device and application.
- the server performs capability negotiation.
- the method further includes: the application server sending, to the policy control function network element, indication information indicating the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored.
- the application server sends indication information for indicating the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored to the policy control function network element, and finally sends the indication information to the user plane network element through the session management network element, ensuring that User plane network elements can sense the type of transport layer protocol used by the current service to be monitored, such as TCP, RTP/RTCP, etc.
- a communication method includes: a user plane network element obtains network status information of a service flow to be monitored; and the user plane network element sends the network status information of a service flow to be monitored to a terminal device according to the network status information of the service flow to be monitored. At least one data packet in the service flow is monitored, and the ratio of the number of data packets carrying the CE mark in the at least one data packet to the number of the at least one data packet is used to determine the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the user plane network element obtains the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, it adds a CE mark to at least one data packet according to the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, and sends at least one data packet to the terminal. equipment. Furthermore, the terminal device counts the ECN mark of at least one data packet, and feeds the statistical results back to the application server through the transport layer feedback message, so that the application server can determine the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on the ECN mark of at least one data packet. This allows the application server to adjust the service parameters of the service flow to be monitored according to the network status of the service flow to be monitored, such as adjusting the media code rate, to ensure the user's business experience and improve the effective utilization of network resources.
- the access network device can transmit the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the information is sent to the user plane network element, and then the user plane network element exposes the network status information to the application server by adding a CE mark to at least one data packet.
- access network equipment does not need to parse the IP layer header of downlink data packets, so security is higher. .
- the method further includes: the user plane network element receives a network status information opening rule from the session management network element, and the network status information opening rule is used to determine whether to open the network status information opening rule.
- the network status information of the service flow to be monitored is a method, and the network status information opening rules include one or more of the following: a method of receiving the network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the access network device, or a method for indicating that the network status information of the service flow to be monitored is The network status information of the service flow to be monitored adds CE mark indication information to the at least one data packet.
- a communication device in a sixth aspect, includes an acquisition unit and a transceiver unit.
- the acquisition unit is used to acquire network status information of the service flow to be monitored;
- the transceiver unit is used to receive the first transmission layer from the terminal device.
- Feedback message the first transport layer feedback message corresponds to at least one data packet in the service flow to be monitored;
- the transceiver unit is also configured to send a second transport layer feedback message to the application server according to the first transport layer feedback message, the The second transport layer feedback message includes the information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the acquisition unit is a transceiver unit, and the transceiver unit is specifically configured to receive network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the access network device.
- the acquisition unit is a processing unit
- the processing unit is specifically configured to monitor the network status of the service flow to be monitored according to the monitoring configuration information of the service flow to be monitored, and obtain the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is TCP
- the information used to indicate the network status information of the service flow to be monitored includes at least one of the following: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of data packets carrying the CE mark The number of payload bits of the data packet, the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the ECT1 tag, or the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the ECT0 tag.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is the QUIC protocol
- the information used to indicate the network information of the service flow to be monitored includes at least one of the following: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 The number of marked packets, or the number of packets carrying the ECT0 mark.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is RTP/RTCP
- the information used to determine the network information of the service flow to be monitored includes at least one of the following: the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark, The number of ECT0 marked data packets, the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of lost packets, the number of duplicate received data packets, or the number of data packets not carrying the ECN mark.
- the communication device further includes a processing unit configured to generate, based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored and the ECN mark of the at least one data packet The information used to indicate the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the transceiver unit is further configured to receive the at least one data packet from the application server; the processing unit is further configured to determine an ECN mark of the at least one data packet.
- the processing unit is further configured to obtain the ECN mark of the at least one data packet from the first transport layer feedback message.
- the transceiver unit is also configured to receive a first transport layer data packet from the terminal device, where the first transport layer data packet corresponds to the service flow to be monitored;
- the transceiver unit is also configured to send a second transport layer data packet to the application server according to the first transport layer data packet.
- the second transport layer data packet Includes indication information indicating that feedback of network status information through the transport layer is supported.
- the processing unit is further configured to determine that the first transport layer data packet includes information indicating that feedback of network status information through the transport layer is not supported.
- the transceiver unit is also configured to receive a TCP connection establishment message from the terminal; the processing unit is also configured to: according to the TCP header of the TCP connection establishment message.
- the values of the three bits AE, CWR and ECE determine whether the terminal device supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- the communication device further includes a processing unit, the transceiver unit is used to receive the data packet from the terminal device; the processing unit is also used to perform IP processing according to the data packet.
- the value of the ECN field in the header determines whether the terminal device supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- the transceiver unit is also configured to receive uplink session description protocol information from the terminal device; the processing unit is further configured to determine that the terminal is based on the uplink session description protocol information. Whether to support the ability to expose network status information through the transport layer.
- the communication device further includes a processing unit, and if the application server supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, the processing unit is configured to perform the processing according to the to-be- Monitoring the network status information of the service flow generates information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the transceiver unit is also used to receive a TCP connection establishment message from the application server; the processing unit is also used to generate a TCP header according to the TCP connection establishment message.
- the values of the three bits AE, CWR and ECE determine the application server's ability to support opening network status information through the transport layer.
- the transceiver unit is also used to receive a data packet from the application server; the processing unit is also used to obtain the ECN field according to the IP header of the data packet. Value that determines the application server's ability to support exposing network state information through the transport layer.
- the transceiver unit is also used to receive downlink session description protocol information from the application server; the processing unit is also used to determine the application based on the downlink session description protocol information.
- the server supports the ability to expose network state information through the transport layer.
- the transceiver unit is also used to receive network status information opening rules from the session management network element, and the network status information opening rules are used to determine whether to open the pending session through the transport layer. How to monitor network status information of business flows.
- the network status information opening rules include one or more of the following: indication information used to indicate intervention in the transport layer capability negotiation process between the terminal device and the application server, transmission information used to indicate the use of the service flow to be monitored Instruction information of the layer protocol, a method of receiving network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the access network device, a method of detecting the first transport layer feedback message, or adding an indication in the first transport layer feedback message
- the transport layer capability negotiation process is used to determine whether feedback of network status information through the transport layer is supported.
- a communication device in a seventh aspect, includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
- the transceiver unit is used to receive network status information from an application function network element indicating that the service flow to be monitored is opened to the outside through the transport layer.
- Instruction information the processing unit is configured to determine a monitoring strategy and a network status information opening strategy for the service flow to be monitored based on the instruction information for instructing to open the network status information of the service flow to be monitored through the transport layer, the monitoring strategy Used to determine the monitoring configuration information of the business flow to be monitored.
- the monitoring configuration information is used to monitor the network status of the business flow to be monitored.
- the network status information opening policy is used to determine the network status information opening rules.
- the network status information opening rules are used It is used to determine the way to open the network status information of the service flow to be monitored through the transport layer; the transceiver unit is also used to send the monitoring policy and the network status information opening policy to the session management network element.
- the network status information opening policy or the network status information opening rule includes one or more of the following: instruction information used to instruct intervention in the transport layer capability negotiation process between the terminal device and the application server, instruction information used to instruct the Indicative information of the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored, a method of receiving network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the access network device, a method of detecting a transport layer feedback message from the terminal device, and feedback messages at the transport layer A method of adding information indicating the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, or indication information indicating adding a CE mark to at least one data packet according to the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, the transport layer capability
- the negotiation process includes the process of determining whether the ability to feed back network status information through the transport layer is supported.
- the transceiver unit is also configured to receive instruction information from the application function network element for instructing to intervene in the transport layer capability negotiation process between the terminal device and the application server. .
- the transceiver unit is further configured to receive indication information from the application function network element for indicating the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored.
- a communication device in an eighth aspect, includes a transceiver unit.
- the transceiver unit is used to receive the monitoring policy and the network status information opening policy of the service flow to be monitored from the policy control function network element; the transceiver unit also uses For sending network status information opening rules to user plane network elements according to the network status information opening policy, the network status information opening rules are used to determine the way to open the network status information of the to-be-monitored service flow through the transport layer; the transceiver unit also uses The monitoring configuration information of the service flow to be monitored is sent to the access network device according to the monitoring policy, and the monitoring configuration information is used to monitor the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the network status information opening policy or the network status information opening rule includes one or more of the following: instruction information used to instruct intervention in the transport layer capability negotiation process between the terminal device and the application server, instruction information used to instruct the Indicative information of the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored, a method of receiving network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the access network device, a method of detecting a transport layer feedback message from the terminal device, and feedback messages at the transport layer A method of adding information indicating the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, or indication information indicating adding a CE mark to at least one data packet according to the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, the transport layer capability
- the negotiation process includes the process of determining whether the ability to feed back network status information through the transport layer is supported.
- a communication device in a ninth aspect, includes a transceiver unit, the transceiver unit is configured to send indication information to the policy control function network element for instructing the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to be opened to the outside through the transport layer;
- the transceiver unit is also used to send at least one data packet in the service flow to be monitored;
- the transceiver unit is also used to receive a second transport layer feedback message from the user plane network element, and the second transport layer feedback message is consistent with the at least one
- the second transport layer feedback message includes information indicating network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is TCP
- the information used to indicate the network status information of the service flow to be monitored includes at least one of the following: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of data packets carrying the CE mark The number of payload bits of the data packet, the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the ECT1 tag, or the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the ECT0 tag.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is the QUIC protocol
- the information used to indicate the network information of the service flow to be monitored includes at least one of the following: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 The number of marked packets, or the number of packets carrying the ECT0 mark.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is RTP/RTCP
- the information used to determine the network information of the service flow to be monitored includes one or more of the following: the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark , the number of data packets carrying the ECT0 mark, the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of lost packets, the number of duplicately received data packets, or the number of data packets not carrying the ECN mark.
- the transceiver unit is further configured to send instruction information to the policy control function network element for instructing to intervene in the transport layer capability negotiation process between the terminal device and the application server.
- the transport layer capability negotiation process includes a process of determining whether to support the ability to feed back network status information through the transport layer.
- the transceiver unit is further configured to send indication information for indicating the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored to the policy control function network element.
- a communication device in a tenth aspect, includes an acquisition unit and a transceiver unit.
- the acquisition unit is used to acquire network status information of a business flow to be monitored; and the transceiver unit is used to obtain network status information of a business flow to be monitored.
- the information is sent to the terminal device at least one data packet in the service flow to be monitored.
- the ratio of the number of data packets carrying the CE mark in the at least one data packet to the number of the at least one data packet is used to determine the number of the service flow to be monitored. network status.
- the acquisition unit is a transceiver unit, and the transceiver unit is specifically configured to receive network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the access network device.
- the acquisition unit is a processing unit
- the processing unit is specifically configured to monitor the network status of the service flow to be monitored according to the monitoring configuration information of the service flow to be monitored, and obtain the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the transceiver unit is also used to receive network status information opening rules from the session management network element, and the network status information opening rules are used to determine whether to open the service flow to be monitored.
- the network status information opening rules include one or more of the following: a method of receiving the network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the access network device, or a method for indicating that the network status information of the service flow to be monitored is The network status information adds CE mark indication information to the at least one data packet.
- a communication device including a processor.
- the processor is coupled to a memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the first aspect and the method in any of the first possible implementations, or to implement any of the fifth aspect and the fifth aspect. possible implementation methods.
- the communication device further includes a memory.
- the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
- the communication device is a user plane network element.
- the communication interface may be a transceiver or an input/output interface.
- the communication device is a chip configured in a user plane network element.
- the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
- the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
- the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
- a communication device including a processor.
- the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the above second aspect and the method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
- the communication device further includes a memory.
- the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
- the communication device is a policy control function network element.
- the communication interface can be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
- the communication device is a chip configured in a policy control function network element.
- the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
- the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
- the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
- a communication device including a processor.
- the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the method in the above third aspect and any possible implementation manner of the third aspect.
- the communication device further includes a memory.
- the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
- the communication device is a session management network element.
- the communication interface may be a transceiver or an input/output interface.
- the communication device is a chip configured in the session management network element.
- the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
- the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
- the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
- a communication device including a processor.
- the processor is coupled to the memory and can be used to execute instructions in the memory to implement the fourth aspect and the method in any of the possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect.
- the communication device further includes a memory.
- the communication device further includes a communication interface, and the processor is coupled to the communication interface.
- the communication device is an application server.
- the communication interface may be a transceiver, or an input/output interface.
- the communication device is a chip configured in an application server.
- the communication interface may be an input/output interface.
- the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
- the input/output interface may be an input/output circuit.
- a processor including: an input circuit, an output circuit and a processing circuit.
- the processing circuit is configured to receive a signal through the input circuit and transmit a signal through the output circuit, so that the processor executes the method in any one of the possible implementations of the first to fifth aspects.
- the above-mentioned processor can be one or more chips
- the input circuit can be an input pin
- the output circuit can be an output pin
- the processing circuit can be a transistor, a gate circuit, a flip-flop and various logic circuits, etc.
- the input signal received by the input circuit may be received and input by, for example, but not limited to, the receiver, and the signal output by the output circuit may be, for example, but not limited to, output to and transmitted by the transmitter, and the input circuit and the output A circuit may be the same circuit that functions as an input circuit and an output circuit at different times.
- the embodiments of this application do not limit the specific implementation methods of the processor and various circuits.
- a processing device including a processor and a memory.
- the processor is used to read instructions stored in the memory, and can receive signals through a receiver and transmit signals through a transmitter to execute the method in any possible implementation manner of the first to fifth aspects.
- processors there are one or more processors and one or more memories.
- the memory may be integrated with the processor, or the memory may be separate from the processor. set up.
- the memory can be a non-transitory memory, such as a read-only memory (ROM), which can be integrated on the same chip as the processor, or can be set in different On the chip, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of memory and the arrangement of the memory and the processor.
- ROM read-only memory
- relevant data interaction processes such as sending indication information, may be a process of outputting indication information from the processor, and receiving uplink data packets may be a process of the processor receiving uplink data packets.
- the data output by the processor can be output to the transmitter, and the input data received by the processor can be from the receiver.
- the transmitter and receiver can be collectively called a transceiver.
- the processing device in the sixteenth aspect above may be one or more chips.
- the processor in the processing device can be implemented by hardware or software.
- the processor can be a logic circuit, an integrated circuit, etc.; when implemented by software, the processor can be a general processor, which is implemented by reading software codes stored in a memory, and the memory can Integrated in the processor, it can be located outside the processor and exist independently.
- a computer program product includes: a computer program (which may also be called a code, or an instruction).
- a computer program which may also be called a code, or an instruction.
- the computer program When the computer program is run, it causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned first aspect to A method in any possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect.
- a computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program (which may also be called code, or instructions) when run on a computer, so that the above-mentioned first aspect is achieved.
- the method in any possible implementation manner in the fifth aspect is executed.
- a communication system including the aforementioned user plane network element and application server.
- the communication system also includes the aforementioned policy control network element and/or session management network element.
- Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system suitable for the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 2 is a schematic flow chart of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 3 is a schematic flow chart of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the TCP header format of TCP acknowledgment (ACK);
- FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of the IP header format of the data packet
- Figure 6 is a schematic flow chart of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 7 is a schematic flow chart of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 8 is a schematic diagram of the format of RTCP feedback report
- Figure 9 is a schematic flow chart of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 10 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the application.
- Figure 11 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by another embodiment of the application.
- Figure 12 is a schematic diagram of a chip system provided by an embodiment of the application.
- LTE long term evolution
- FDD frequency division duplex
- TDD time division duplex
- UMTS universal mobile telecommunication system
- WiMAX global interoperability for microwave access
- 5G mobile communication system described in this application includes a non-standalone (NSA) 5G mobile communication system or a standalone (SA) 5G mobile communication system.
- NSA non-standalone
- SA standalone
- the communication system can also be a public land mobile network (PLMN), a device to device (D2D) communication system, a machine to machine (M2M) communication system, the Internet of things (Internet of things) , IoT) communication system, vehicle to everything (V2X) communication system, unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) communication system or other communication systems.
- PLMN public land mobile network
- D2D device to device
- M2M machine to machine
- IoT Internet of things
- V2X vehicle to everything
- UAV unmanned aerial vehicle
- At least one of the following or similar expressions thereof refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (items) or a plurality of items (items).
- at least one of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c, or a-b-c, where a, b, c can be single or multiple .
- words such as “first” and “second” are used to distinguish the same or similar items with basically the same functions and effects.
- words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the number and execution order, and words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the number and execution order.
- words such as “exemplary” or “for example” are used to represent examples, illustrations or explanations. Any embodiment or design described as “exemplary” or “such as” in the embodiments of the present application is not to be construed as preferred or advantageous over other embodiments or designs. Rather, the use of words such as “exemplary” or “such as” is intended to present related concepts in a concrete manner that is easier to understand.
- FIG. 1 An application scenario of the embodiment of the present application is first described in detail with reference to FIG. 1 .
- User equipment can be called terminal equipment, terminal, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, user terminal, wireless communication equipment , user agent or user device.
- the terminal device may also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, a wireless local loop (WLL) station, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a wireless Handheld devices with communication functions, computing devices or other processing devices connected to wireless modems, vehicle-mounted devices, drones, wearable devices, terminal devices in 5G networks or terminal devices in evolved PLMN, etc., the embodiments of this application are suitable for This is not limiting.
- Access network Provides network access functions for authorized users in a specific area, and can use transmission tunnels of different qualities according to user levels, business needs, etc.
- the access network may be an access network using different access technologies.
- Current access network technologies include: wireless wireless Access network technology, wireless access network technology used in 4th generation (4G) systems, or next generation radio access network (NG-RAN) technology (such as those used in 5G systems) wireless access technology, etc.).
- An access network that implements access network functions based on wireless communication technology can be called a radio access network (RAN).
- the wireless access network can manage wireless resources, provide access services to terminals, and complete the forwarding of control signals and user data between the terminals and the core network.
- the wireless access network equipment may be, for example, a base station (NodeB), an evolved base station (evolved NodeB, eNB or eNodeB), a next generation base station node (next generation Node base station, gNB) in a 5G mobile communication system, or a future mobile communication system.
- the base station or the access point (AP) in the wifi wireless hotspot system, etc. can also be the wireless controller in the cloud wireless access network (cloud radio access network, CRAN) scenario, or the wireless access network equipment It can be relay stations, access points, vehicle-mounted equipment, drones, wearable devices, network equipment in 5G networks or network equipment in evolved PLMN, etc.
- the embodiments of this application do not limit the specific technology and specific equipment form used by the wireless access network equipment.
- Access management network element Mainly used for mobility management and access management, responsible for transmitting user policies between user equipment and policy control function (PCF) network elements, etc., and can be used to implement mobility management entities (mobile management entity, MME) functions other than session management. For example, access authorization (authentication) function.
- PCF policy control function
- the access management network element can be an access and mobility management function (AMF) network element.
- AMF access and mobility management function
- the access management network element can still be an AMF network element, or it can have other names, which are not limited in this application.
- Session management network element Mainly used for session management, allocation and management of Internet protocol (IP) addresses of user equipment, selection of endpoints for manageable user plane functions, policy control and charging function interfaces, and downlink Data communications, etc.
- IP Internet protocol
- the session management network element may be a session management function (SMF) network element.
- SMF session management function
- the session management network element can still be an SMF network element, or it can also have other names, which is not limited in this application.
- User plane network element used for packet routing and forwarding, quality of services (QoS) processing of user plane data, completing user plane data forwarding, session/flow level-based billing statistics, bandwidth limitation functions, etc.
- QoS quality of services
- the user plane network element can be a user plane function (UPF) network element.
- UPF user plane function
- user plane network elements can still be UPF network elements, or they can have other names, which are not limited in this application.
- Data network element used to provide a network for transmitting data.
- the data network element may be a data network (DN) network element.
- DN data network
- data network elements can still be DN network elements, or they can have other names, which are not limited in this application.
- Policy control network element A unified policy framework used to guide network behavior and provide policy rule information for control plane functional network elements (such as AMF, SMF network elements, etc.).
- the policy control network element may be a policy and charging rules function (PCRF) network element.
- the policy control network element may be a policy control function (policy control function, PCF) network element.
- policy control network element can still be a PCF network element, or it can also have other names, which is not limited in this application.
- Data management network element used to handle user equipment identification, access authentication, registration, and mobility management.
- the data management network element can be a unified data management (UDM) network element; in the 4G communication system, the data management network element can be a home subscriber server (HSS) network element. Yuan. In future communication systems, the data management network element can still be a UDM network element, or it can also have other names, which is not limited in this application.
- UDM unified data management
- HSS home subscriber server
- Network exposure function (NEF) network element used to safely open to the outside the services and capabilities provided by the 3rd generation partnership project (3rd generation partnership project, 3GPP) network functions.
- Application function (AF) network element Provides certain application layer services to UE. When AF provides services to UE, it has requirements for QoS policies and charging policies, and needs to notify the network. At the same time, AF also needs to obtain information related to core network feedback applications.
- the AF can have all the functions of the AF defined in the technical specification (TS) 23.501R-15 version, as well as related functions for application services. That is to say, in the user plane architecture, the application server (AS) and the UE communicate on the user plane through the UE-RAN-UPF-AF path.
- AF can also communicate with other network functions (NF) in the 5G core network (5G core network, 5GC) through NEF in the control plane architecture. For example, communicating with PCF through NEF. If the AF is deployed by the operator of the 5GC, the AF can also communicate directly with other NFs in the 5GC in the control plane architecture, such as directly communicating with the PCF, without passing through the NEF.
- NF network functions
- NWDAF Network data analysis function
- OAM operation administration and maintenance
- the solution analyzes the data and provides feedback to network elements, AF, etc. for network or service configuration optimization, thereby providing better network quality and service experience.
- Network repository function (NRF) network element It can be used to provide network element discovery functions and provide network element information corresponding to the network element type based on the requests of other network elements. NRF network elements also provide network element management services, such as network element registration, update, de-registration, network element status subscription and push, etc.
- AUSF Authentication server function
- Service communication proxy (SCP) network element It can be used for direct indirect communication of NF, and the service request of NF can be proxied by SCP.
- N1, N2, N3, N4, N6, N9, Nnwdaf, Nnef, Nnrf, Npcf, Nudm, Naf, Nausf, Namf and Nsmf are interface serial numbers. The meaning of these interface serial numbers can be found in the meaning defined in 3GPP technical standards (TS) 23.501.
- the AMF, SMF, UPF, NEF, PCF, UDM, NWDAF, NRF, AUSF, SCP, etc. shown in Figure 1 can be understood as network elements used to implement different functions in the core network. For example, they can be combined as needed. Network slicing. These core network elements can be independent devices, or they can be integrated into the same device to implement different functions. This application Please do not limit the specific form of the above network elements.
- Third-party applications refer to applications provided by manufacturers other than the manufacturer of the terminal device or the operator.
- the RAN can monitor the congestion status of the network and expose the network status information by carrying an explicit congestion notification (ECN) mark in the IP layer header of the downlink data packet.
- ECN explicit congestion notification
- the RAN carries an ECN mark (ECN mark, or ECN lable) in the IP layer header of the downlink data packet and sends the downlink data packet to the UE.
- the UE counts at least one received downlink data packet that carries the ECN mark.
- the number of downlink data packets and/or the number of payload bits of downlink data packets carrying ECN marks, and the statistical results are sent to the application server side through the transport layer feedback mechanism, so that third-party applications can obtain the network status.
- the third-party application cannot sense the network status.
- the RAN since the RAN is located closer to the user side than the core network elements and has the possibility of being physically damaged, the RAN parses the IP layer of the downlink data packet and carries the ECN mark in the IP layer header of the downlink data packet. There are certain safety risks.
- embodiments of the present application provide a communication method in order to optimize the way in which network status information is fed back to the application server through the transport layer.
- the service flow from the terminal device or the access network device and the destination address is the application server is called uplink service flow
- the service flow from the application server and the destination address is the terminal device is called Downstream business flow.
- the application server provides the terminal device with application services corresponding to the uplink service flow and/or the downlink service flow.
- the transport layer in the embodiment of the present application is used to provide end-to-end transmission of media or application content to ensure reliable transmission of media content.
- the transport layer may include a transport control protocol (transport control protocol, TCP), user datagram protocol (UDP), quick UDP Internet connection (QUIC) protocol, real-time transport protocol (RTP), real-time transport control protocol (real-time Transport control protocol, RTCP) and other transport layer protocols.
- FIG. 2 shows a schematic flow chart of the communication method 200 provided by the embodiment of the present application. Various steps included in the method 200 are described in detail below.
- the user plane network element obtains the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the network status information of the business flow to be monitored includes one or more of the following: transmission delay of data packets in the business flow to be monitored, transmission queue length of the business flow to be monitored, congestion information of the business flow to be monitored, business flow to be monitored The packet loss rate or the available bandwidth of the service flow to be monitored.
- the congestion information of the service flow to be monitored is used to determine whether congestion occurs in the service flow to be monitored and/or the degree of congestion of the service flow to be monitored.
- the congestion information of the service flow to be monitored may include one or more of the following: Data packets in the service flow to be monitored transmission delay, transmission delay threshold, send queue length of the service flow to be monitored, send queue length threshold, packet loss rate of the service flow to be monitored, packet loss rate threshold, available bandwidth of the service flow to be monitored, or available bandwidth threshold .
- the transmission delay of the data packets in the service flow to be monitored and the transmission delay threshold can be used to determine whether congestion occurs in the service flow to be monitored. For example, if the transmission delay of the data packets in the business flow to be monitored is greater than or equal to the transmission delay threshold, the business flow to be monitored is congested; if the transmission delay of the data packets in the business flow to be monitored is less than the transmission delay threshold, Then there is no congestion in the service flow to be monitored.
- the transmission delay and transmission delay threshold of the data packets in the service flow to be monitored can also be used to determine the congestion level of the service flow to be monitored. For example, if the ratio of the transmission delay of the data packets in the service flow to be monitored to the transmission delay threshold is 60%, then the congestion level of the service flow to be monitored is 60%.
- the sending queue length of the service flow to be monitored and the sending queue length threshold can be used to determine whether congestion occurs in the service flow to be monitored, or to determine the degree of congestion of the service flow to be monitored.
- the packet loss rate and packet loss rate threshold of the service flow to be monitored can be used to determine whether congestion occurs in the service flow to be monitored, or to determine the degree of congestion of the service flow to be monitored.
- the available bandwidth of the service flow to be monitored and the available bandwidth threshold can be used to determine whether congestion occurs in the service flow to be monitored, or to determine the degree of congestion of the service flow to be monitored.
- the embodiments of this application do not limit the way in which the user plane network element obtains the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the user plane network element receives the network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the access network device.
- the user plane network element receives an uplink data packet from the access network device, and the user plane general packet radio system (GPRS) tunneling protocol (GPRS tunneling protocol user plane, GTP-U) layer of the uplink data packet
- GPRS general packet radio system
- GTP-U user plane general packet radio system tunneling protocol
- the header includes network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the user plane network element receives the network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the access network device through the session management network element. That is, the session management network element receives the network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the access network device, and then the session The management network element sends the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to the user plane network element.
- the content included in the network status information of the service flow to be monitored sent by the access network device is related to the monitoring configuration information received by the access network device.
- the monitoring configuration information is used to monitor the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the monitoring configuration information includes monitoring parameters and the identifier of the service flow to be monitored or the GTP-U tunnel identifier.
- Monitoring parameters can include one or more of the following: transmission delay, packet loss rate, congestion level, send data queue length, or available bandwidth.
- the network status information of the service flow to be monitored sent by the access network device may include the transmission delay of the data packets in the service flow to be monitored.
- the network status information of the service flow to be monitored sent by the access network device includes the congestion information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the identifier of the business flow to be monitored is used to identify the business flow to be monitored.
- the identifier of the service flow to be monitored includes one or more of the following: data connection session identifier (such as: protocol data unit (PDU) session identifier, or IP-connectivity access network, IP-CAN) session identifier, or other session identifiers (for the convenience of description, subsequent embodiments take a PDU session as an example), business flow description information, application identifier, QoS flow identifier (QoS flow identifier, QFI), service type Identity or application type identification.
- data connection session identifier such as: protocol data unit (PDU) session identifier, or IP-connectivity access network, IP-CAN) session identifier, or other session identifiers (for the convenience of description, subsequent embodiments take a PDU session as an example
- business flow description information such as: application identifier, QoS flow identifier (QoS flow identifier, QFI), service type Identity or application type identification.
- the PDU session identifier is the session identifier information of the PDU session carrying the service flow to be monitored. For example, if the PDU session only carries the service flow to be monitored, the identifier of the service flow to be monitored may be the PDU session identifier.
- the business flow description information is used to determine the business flow to be monitored.
- the service flow description information may be at least one of the IP packet filtering sets such as IP five-tuple description information, IP triplet information, domain name, uplink and downlink, etc. of the service flow to be monitored.
- the IP five-tuple description information of the service flow to be monitored can be: source IP address (source IP address), destination IP address (destination IP address), source port number (source port number), destination port number (destination port) number) and protocol type.
- the IP triplet information of the service flow to be monitored can be: destination IP address, destination port number and protocol type.
- the service flow description information can be at least one of the Ethernet (ethernet) header information, for example, the source media access control (media access control, MAC) address and destination MAC address, virtual local area network (virtual local area network, VLAN) identification, etc. .
- the business flow description information may also include application identity.
- the service flow description information may be called service data flow (service data flow, SDF) description information.
- SDF description information please refer to the IP packet filter set.
- the description of the IP packet filter set please refer to the description in 3GPP TS 23.501.
- the application identifier is used to identify the application corresponding to the service flow to be monitored. If the application only has the service flow to be monitored, the identifier of the service flow to be monitored may be the application identifier.
- QFI is used to identify the QoS flow in which the service flow to be monitored is transmitted. For example, if the QoS flow only corresponds to the service flow to be monitored, that is, only the service flow to be monitored is transmitted in the QoS flow, the identifier of the service flow to be monitored may be QFI.
- the service type identifier may be an identifier of the type of service flow to be monitored.
- the type of service flow to be monitored may be video service, voice service, game service or web browsing service, etc.
- the application type identifier may be an identifier of the type of application corresponding to the service flow to be monitored.
- the monitoring configuration information of the service flow to be monitored also includes triggering conditions for reporting network status information of the service flow to be monitored. For example, if the monitoring configuration information of the service flow to be monitored includes a transmission delay threshold, then when the transmission delay of the data packets in the target service flow to be monitored exceeds the transmission delay threshold, reporting of the network status information of the service flow to be monitored is triggered.
- the monitoring configuration information of the service flow to be monitored also includes a reporting period for reporting network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the access network device periodically sends network status information of the service flow to be monitored according to the reporting cycle.
- the monitoring configuration information of the service flow to be monitored also includes a method of reporting the target network element identifier and/or reporting network status information.
- the reporting target network element identifier is the identifier of the target network element to which the access network device reports the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the reporting target network element identifier is the identifier of the user plane network element or the identifier of the session management network element.
- the methods for reporting network status information include user plane method or control plane method.
- the user plane method refers to the access network device reporting the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to the user plane network element.
- the user plane method also includes reporting network status information through the GTP-U layer of the uplink data packet, that is, the access network device carries the network status information of the service flow to be monitored in the GTP-U layer header of the uplink data packet and sends it. to user plane network elements.
- the control plane method refers to the access network device reporting the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to the control plane network element (such as the session management network element).
- the user plane network element obtains the network status information of the service flow to be monitored by monitoring the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the user plane network element monitors the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on the received monitoring configuration information. For example, if the monitoring parameters include transmission delay, the user plane network element monitors the transmission delay of the data packets in the service flow to be monitored between the access network equipment and the user plane network element, and obtains the data packets in the service flow to be monitored. transmission delay.
- the monitoring parameter includes the packet loss rate
- the user plane network element monitors the packet loss situation of the data packets in the service flow to be monitored to obtain the packet loss rate of the service flow to be monitored.
- S220 The user plane network element receives the first transport layer feedback message from the terminal device.
- the terminal device sends the first transport layer feedback message to the user plane network element.
- the first transport layer feedback message corresponds to at least one data packet in the service flow to be monitored, that is, the first transport layer feedback message is a feedback message for at least one data packet in the service to be monitored.
- the first transport layer feedback message may be received when the user plane network element obtains the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, or may be received after the user plane network element obtains the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the embodiments of this application do not limit the manner in which the terminal device sends the first transport layer feedback message to the user plane network element. For example, if there are both uplink and downlink data flows in the service flow to be monitored, the terminal device can send the first transport layer feedback message, that is, the first transmission layer, to the user plane network element through the uplink data flow in the service flow to be monitored. Layer feedback messages belong to the business flow to be monitored. For another example, if there is only a downlink data flow in the service flow to be monitored, the terminal device can send the first transport layer feedback message to the user plane network element through the uplink service flow, that is, the first transport layer feedback message corresponds to the service flow to be monitored. The upstream service flow and the service flow to be monitored correspond to the same service.
- the embodiment of this application does not limit the form of the first transport layer feedback message.
- the first transport layer feedback message may be a TCP acknowledgment (ACK).
- TCP ACK TCP acknowledgment
- the first transport layer feedback message may be QUIC ACK.
- QUC ACK For more description of QUC ACK, please refer to method 600 below.
- the first transport layer feedback message is an RTCP feedback report.
- RTCP reporting please refer to method 700 below.
- S230 The user plane network element sends the second transport layer feedback message to the application server.
- the user plane network element sends a second transport layer feedback message to the application server according to the first transport layer feedback message, which includes: the user plane network element generates a network status information indicating the network status based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored. information; the user plane network element generates a second transport layer feedback message by adding information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored in the first transport layer feedback message; the user plane network element sends the second transport layer feedback message to the application server information.
- the user plane network element sends a second transport layer feedback message to the application server based on the first transport layer feedback message, which includes: the user plane network element generates a message for indicating the network based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored. Status information; the user plane network element generates a second transport layer feedback message by modifying some fields in the first transport layer feedback message; the user plane network element sends the second transport layer feedback message to the application server.
- the network status indicated by the information indicating the network status is the same as the network status indicated by the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, or the information used to indicate the network status and the network status information of the service flow to be monitored may be the same.
- the network status information of the service flow to be monitored includes the available bandwidth threshold and the available bandwidth of the service flow to be monitored. If the ratio of the available bandwidth of the service flow to be monitored to the available bandwidth threshold is 60%, it indicates the congestion level of the service flow to be monitored. It's 60%.
- the second transport layer feedback message sent by the user plane network element to the application server includes information indicating the network status, indicating that the congestion level of the service flow to be monitored is 60%.
- the user plane network element generates information indicating the network status based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, including: the user plane network element generates information indicating the network status based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored and at least one data A packet's ECN marking generates information indicating network status.
- the manner in which the user plane network element generates information indicating the network status may refer to the descriptions in S314 of method 300, S616 of method 600, and S715 of method 700 below.
- the embodiments of this application do not limit the way in which the user plane network element obtains the ECN mark of at least one data packet.
- the user plane network element obtains the ECN mark of at least one data packet, including: the user plane network element receives at least one data packet from the application server; the user plane network element determines the ECN mark of at least one data packet. That is, the user plane network element determines the ECN mark of at least one data packet by parsing the IP layer of at least one data packet. Furthermore, users A surface network element can save the ECN mark of at least one data packet.
- the user plane network element obtains the ECN mark of at least one data packet, including: the user plane network element obtains the ECN mark of at least one data packet from the first transport layer feedback message.
- the user plane network element obtains the ECN mark of at least one data packet from the first transport layer feedback message.
- the embodiments of this application do not limit the triggering conditions for user plane network elements to generate information indicating network status.
- the trigger conditions for the user plane network element to generate information indicating network status include: network status information of the service flow to be monitored and the first transport layer feedback message, that is, the user plane network element obtains the network status information to be monitored. In the case of the network status information of the service flow and the first transport layer feedback message, information indicating the network status is generated.
- the triggering conditions for the user plane network element to generate information indicating network status include: the user plane network element determines that the application server supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, that is, the user plane network element determines If the application server supports the ability to expose network status information through the transport layer, generate information indicating network status.
- the method for the user plane network element to determine the application server's ability to support opening network status information through the transport layer may refer to the descriptions in method 300, method 600 and method 700 below.
- the triggering conditions for the user plane network element to generate information indicating the network status include: the user plane network element receives the network status information opening rule, that is, the user plane network element receives the network status information opening rule.
- information indicating the network status is generated according to the network status information opening rules.
- Network status information opening rules are used to determine the way to open the network status information of the service flow to be monitored through the transport layer.
- the network status information opening rules include one or more of the following: indication information for instructing the transport layer capability negotiation process between the involved terminal device and the application server, indication information for instructing external opening rules, indication information from the access network A way for the device to receive network status information of the service flow to be monitored, a way to detect the first transport layer feedback message from the terminal device, and a way to add information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored in the first transport layer feedback message.
- the transport layer capability negotiation process includes: a process of determining whether to support the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- the instruction information used to instruct the intervention in the transport layer capability negotiation process between the terminal device and the application server indicates whether to intervene in the transport layer capability negotiation process between the terminal device and the application server, or instructs the user plane network element to monitor whether the terminal device or application server supports passing
- the transport layer feeds back the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the terminal device does not support it or the application server supports feedback of the network status information of the service flow to be monitored through the transport layer
- the user plane network element replaces the terminal device and the application server.
- the indication information used to indicate the external opening rule indicates that the network status information of the service flow to be monitored will be opened to the external world through the transport layer.
- the support for opening/feeding back network status information through the transport layer means that terminal devices and/or application servers support feedback on network congestion status through protocols such as precise TCP, QUIC, or RTP/RTCP.
- the method of receiving the network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the access network device refers to the method of obtaining the network status information of the service flow to be monitored reported from the access network device, such as from the uplink data packet GTP from the access network device. Obtain the network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the -U header, or obtain the network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the session management network element.
- the session management network element receives the network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the access network device.
- the method of detecting the first transport layer feedback message from the terminal device is used to instruct the user plane network element how to determine that the data is the first transport layer feedback message of the terminal device.
- the user plane network element identifies the TCP data
- the ACK bit in the header thus determines that the data is the corresponding TCP feedback message.
- the information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored is used to instruct the user plane network element to obtain the ECN mark in the at least one data packet for different transmission protocols and generate a second transport layer message accordingly.
- the network status information opening rules please refer to the descriptions in method 300, method 600 and method 700 below.
- the method 200 also includes: the user plane network element assists the terminal device and the application server in the transport layer capability negotiation process, that is, User plane network elements intervene in the transport layer capability negotiation process between terminal equipment and application servers.
- the user plane network element assists the terminal device in negotiating transport layer capabilities with the application server, including: the user plane network element receives the first transport layer data packet from the terminal device, and the first transport layer data packet corresponds to the service flow to be monitored; the user plane network element The element sends a second transport layer data packet to the application server according to the first transport layer data packet, where the second transport layer data packet includes indication information indicating support for opening network status information through the transport layer.
- the first transport layer data packet corresponds to the service flow to be monitored, including the following situations: the first transport layer data packet is used to establish the service flow to be monitored, or the first transport layer data packet is for the service flow to be monitored.
- the feedback message of at least one data packet or the first transport layer data packet is used to negotiate the service parameters of the service carried by the service flow to be monitored.
- the method 200 further includes: the user plane network element determines that the first transport layer data packet includes a message indicating that the pass is not supported. Indication of transport layer open network status information.
- the first transport layer data packet and the second transport layer data packet are TCP connection establishment messages.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is RTP or RTCP
- the first transport layer data packet and the second transport layer data packet are uplink session description protocols.
- the user plane network element if it obtains the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, it generates information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored. Further, After receiving the first transport layer feedback message from the terminal device, the user plane network element sends a second transport layer feedback message to the application server according to the first transport layer feedback message.
- the second transport layer feedback message includes a message indicating the service flow to be monitored. Network status information, so that the application server can determine the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on the second transport layer feedback message. This allows the application server to adjust the service parameters of the service flow to be monitored according to the network status of the service flow to be monitored, such as dynamically adjusting the code rate of the media to ensure the user's business experience and improve the effective utilization of network resources.
- the access network device can send the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to the user plane network element, and then the user plane network element opens it to the application server through the transport layer.
- the access network device does not need to parse the IP layer header of the downlink data packet, so the security is higher.
- the network status information does not need to be sent to the terminal device, and then the terminal device sends it to the application server side, which can achieve faster network status information feedback.
- the method provided according to the embodiment of the present application can also be implemented without considering the capabilities of the terminal device. Open the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to the application server through the transport layer. This avoids the problem that when the terminal device does not support the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, it cannot open the network status information of the business flow to be monitored to the application server, so that the application cannot dynamically adjust it, thus affecting the user experience.
- Figure 3 shows a schematic flow chart of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application. Specifically, it is to be monitored in Figure 3
- the transport layer protocol used by the business flow is TCP as an example to illustrate how to open the network status information of the business flow to be monitored through the transport layer according to the method provided in the embodiment of this application.
- the user plane network element (hereinafter referred to as UPF) generates information indicating the network status based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- UPF user plane network element
- the steps included in the method 300 are also different.
- the method 300 may include S301 to S304, S309 and S310, S312 to S315.
- the method 300 may include S301 to S305, S309 and S310, and S312 to S315.
- method 300 may include S301 to S304, S308 to S310, S312 to S315.
- method 300 also includes S306 and S307.
- method 300 also includes S311.
- the application function network element (hereinafter referred to as AF) sends instruction information #1 to the policy control function network element (hereinafter referred to as PCF).
- the PCF receives the indication information #1 from the AF.
- Instruction information #1 is instruction information used to instruct the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to be opened through the transport layer.
- the indication information #1 may be named low latency, low loss, scalable throughput (lowlatenty, low loss, scalable throughput, L4S) indication information.
- the form of indication information #1 may be one or more of the following examples.
- the indication information #1 is service flow description information.
- service flow description information please refer to the description in S210 above.
- the indication information #1 is 1-bit information.
- the indication information #1 is an event identification.
- the event identifier corresponds to the event "opening the network status information of the service flow to be monitored through the transport layer".
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the manner in which the AF sends the instruction information #1 to the PCF.
- the AF can send indication information #1 to the PCF through an application function request (AF request) message. That is, the AF sends an AF request message to the PCF, and the AF request message includes indication information #1.
- the AF request message may be the Npcf_PolicyAuthorization (Npcf_PolicyAuthorization) service.
- the AF directly sends the instruction information #1 to the PCF, or the AF first sends the instruction information #1 to the network exposure function (NEF), and the NEF then forwards the instruction information #1 to the PCF.
- NEF network exposure function
- AF may send indication information #1 to NEF through the Nnef_AFQoS session (Nnef_AFSessionWithQoS) service, and then NEF sends indication information #1 to PCF by calling the Npcf_PolicyAuthorization service.
- the AF sends the service flow description information and the indication information #1 to the PCF.
- the AF sends an AF request message to the PCF, and the AF request message includes service flow description information and indication information #1.
- the AF also sends indication information #2 to the PCF.
- the indication information #2 is indication information used to instruct the intervening terminal equipment (hereinafter referred to as UE) and the AS to perform the transport layer capability negotiation process. More from Instructions #2 The description may refer to S230 in method 200.
- the transport layer capability negotiation process between the UE and the AS refers to the process in which the UE determines whether the AS supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, and the AS determines whether the UE supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- the method of opening network status information through the transport layer includes the L4S method, so the indication information #2 can be used to indicate the L4S capability negotiation between the intervening UE and the AS. process.
- the AF also sends instruction information #3 to the PCF.
- the instruction information #3 is instruction information used to indicate the external opening rules.
- the instruction information #3 is used to instruct the core network to open the rules of network status information to the outside through the transport layer.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is TCP
- the external opening rules indicated by instruction information #3 include: the core network uses TCP for L4S feedback.
- indication information #3 is used to indicate the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored.
- PCF generates policy control and charging (PCC) rules.
- the PCC rules include the monitoring policy of the service flow to be monitored.
- the monitoring policy of the service flow to be monitored is used to determine the monitoring configuration information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the monitoring configuration information please refer to the description in S210 above.
- the monitoring strategy includes monitoring parameters and the identification of the service flow to be monitored.
- the monitoring policy also includes triggering conditions for reporting network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the monitoring policy also includes a reporting period for network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the monitoring strategy also includes a method of reporting the target network element identifier and/or reporting network status information. For more description of the monitoring strategy, please refer to the description of monitoring configuration information in S210 above.
- the PCC rules also include a network status information opening policy.
- the network status information opening policy includes one or more of the following: indication information #2, indication information #3, receiving network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the RAN.
- a method a method of detecting the first transport layer feedback message from the UE, or a method of adding information indicating network status in the first transport layer feedback message.
- the method of receiving the network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the RAN includes: receiving the network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the RAN side through the GTP-U layer header of the uplink data packet, or through the session management network element (downstream).
- the network status information of the service flow to be monitored is received from the RAN side.
- the first transport layer feedback message is TCP ACK.
- Figure 4 shows a schematic diagram of the TCP header of TCP ACK.
- the TCP header of TCP ACK includes the following fields: source port, destination port, sequence number, acknowledgment number, header length, pre- Reserved field, accurate ECN (accurate ECN, ACE) field, urgent (URG) flag, ACK flag, push (PSH) flag, reset (RST) flag, synchronize (SYN) flag , end (finish, FIN) flag, window size (window size), checksum (checksum), urgent pointer (urgent pointer), options (options).
- the ACE field is composed of three bits: accurate ECN (accurate ECN, AE), congestion window reduced bit (congestion window reduced, CWR), and ECN response bit (ECN echo, ECE). Among them, the SYN flag and ACK flag in the TCP header of the TCP connection establishment request are set to "1".
- the method of detecting the first transport layer feedback message from the UE includes: if the ACK flag in the TCP header of the message from the UE is set to " 1", then the message is TCPACK, that is, the message is the first transport layer feedback message.
- ways of adding information indicating network status in the first transport layer feedback message include: modifying the values of some fields in the TCP ACK, or assigning values to some fields in the TCP ACK, so that the values in the TCP ACK Some fields are used to indicate the network status of the service flow to be monitored. Some fields in TCP ACK include one or more of the following: parameter r.cep in the ACE field in the TCP header of TCP ACK, parameter r.ceb in the optional field in the TCP header of TCP ACK, parameter r.e0b, or parameter r.e1b.
- r.cep represents the number of data packets carrying the CE mark
- r.ceb represents the number of payload bits of the data packets carrying the ECN capable transport (ECT) 0 mark
- r.e0b represents the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark.
- the number of payload bits of the data packet, r.e1b indicates the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the CE mark.
- the PCF generates PCC rules based on the instruction information from the AF (ie, one or more of the instruction information #1, the instruction information #2, and the instruction information #3), that is, the PCF generates the PCC rule based on the instruction from the AF.
- the information generates a monitoring strategy, or generates a monitoring strategy and a network status information opening strategy.
- the monitoring policy generated by the PCF based on the instruction information #1 includes a method of reporting the target network element identifier and/or reporting network status information.
- the reporting target network element identifier is the UPF identifier.
- the network status information opening policy generated by the PCF based on the instruction information #1 includes: a method of receiving network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the RAN.
- the network status information opening policy generated by the PCF based on the indication information #1 and the indication information #2 includes: a method for receiving the network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the RAN and the indication information #2.
- the network status information opening policy generated by the PCF based on the indication information #1, the indication information #2, and the indication information #3 includes: the method of receiving the network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the RAN, the indication information #2, the indication information #3.
- S303 PCF sends PCC rules to SMF. Accordingly, SMF receives PCC rules from PCF.
- the PCC rule includes the monitoring policy, or includes the monitoring policy and the network status information opening policy. Therefore, it can be said that the PCF sends the monitoring policy, or sends the monitoring policy and the network status information opening policy to the SMF.
- PCF sends PCC rules to SMF through session management (SM) policy association establishment (SM policy association establishment) process.
- SM session management
- PCF sends PCC rules to SMF through the PCF service interface_SM Policy Control_Create Response (Npcf_SMPolicyControl_Create Response) service operation.
- Npcf_SMPolicyControl_Create Response Npcf_SMPolicyControl_Create Response
- PCF sends PCC rules to SMF through the session management policy association modification (SM policy association modification) process.
- SM policy association modification session management policy association modification
- PCF sends PCC rules to SMF through the PCF service interface_SM Policy Control_Update Notify Request (Npcf_SMPolicyControl_UpdateNotify Request) service operation.
- the PCF also sends instruction information #4 to the SMF.
- the instruction information #4 is used to instruct network status monitoring of the service flow to be monitored and to open the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- PCF receives the indication information #2 and/or the indication information #3 from the AF, but the network status information opening policy generated by the PCF does not include the indication information #2 and/or the indication information #3, then in S303 , PCF also sends indication information #2 and/or indication information #3 to SMF.
- the SMF sends monitoring configuration information to the RAN.
- the RAN receives the monitoring configuration information from the SMF.
- the SMF sends monitoring configuration information to the RAN according to the monitoring policy from the PCF, that is, the SMF determines the monitoring configuration information according to the monitoring policy and sends the monitoring configuration information to the RAN.
- the SMF sends monitoring configuration information to the RAN, including: the SMF sends an N2SM message (N2SM SM message), the N2SM message includes monitoring configuration information.
- N2SM SM message For example, SMF sends N2SM-related containers to AMF.
- the N2SM-related containers include N2SM messages, and AMF then sends the N2SM messages to the RAN side.
- the method 300 also includes S305.
- S305 SMF sends network status information opening rules to UPF.
- UPF receives the network status information opening rules from SMF.
- SMF sends network status information opening rules to UPF according to the network status information opening policy from PCF. That is, SMF determines network status information opening rules according to the network status information opening policy and sends network status information opening rules to UPF.
- the network status information rules are included in the packet detection rules (packet detection rules, PDR) corresponding to the service flow to be monitored.
- SMF sends network status information opening rules to UPF, including: SMF sends an N4 session establishment request (N4session establishment request) message to UPF, and the N4 session establishment request message includes network status information opening rules.
- SMF sends network status information opening rules to UPF, including: SMF sends an N4 session modification request (N4session modification request) message to UPF, and the N4 session modification request message includes network status information opening rules.
- SMF receives indication information #2 and/or indication information #3 from PCF, but the network status information opening rule sent by SMF to UPF does not include indication information #2 and/or indication information #3, then In S305, the SMF also sends indication information #2 and/or indication information #3 to the UPF.
- the method 300 also includes S306 and S307.
- the method 300 can also perform S306 and S307.
- UPF also receives monitoring configuration information from SMF, that is, SMF generates corresponding monitoring configuration information according to the monitoring policy and sends it to the UPF side.
- the monitoring configuration information on the UPF side includes obtaining the network status of the service to be monitored.
- Information method for example, the method of obtaining the network status information of the service flow to be monitored is to obtain the network status information of the service to be monitored through the GTP-U layer header of the upstream data packet on the user plane.
- network status information opening rules are included in the monitoring configuration information.
- the UPF receives the TCP connection establishment message #1 from the UE.
- TCP connection establishment message #1 (an example of the first transport layer data packet) is used to establish a TCP connection between the UE and the AS.
- the TCP connection is used to transmit the service flow to be monitored.
- the TCP header of the TCP connection establishment message #1 includes the following fields: header length, reserved field, AE, CWR, ECE, URG flag, ACK flag, PSH flag, RST flag , SYN flag and FIN flag. Among them, the SYN flag is set to "1". According to the TCP header diagram of the TCP connection establishment message shown in (b) of Figure 4, the SYN flag in the TCP header of the message received by the UPF from the UE is set to "1", then the message is a TCP connection Create message #1.
- UPF sends TCP connection establishment message #2 to AS.
- the AS receives TCP connection establishment message #2 from UPF.
- the UPF sends a TCP connection establishment message #2 (an example of a second transport layer data packet) to the AS based on the TCP connection establishment message #1.
- TCP connection establishment message #2 includes indication information indicating support for opening network status information through the transport layer.
- the AS determines the UE's ability to support opening network status information through the transport layer based on the indication information included in the TCP connection establishment message #2 for indicating support for opening network status information through the transport layer. It should be understood that the AS determines that the UE supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, which does not mean that the UE actually supports the The AS believes that the UE supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- UPF when UPF sends TCP connection establishment message #2 to AS based on TCP connection establishment message #1, it sets the three bit positions of AE, CWR and ECE in the TCP header of TCP connection establishment message #1 to "11 1" and "0 1 0", “0 1 1”, “1 1 0” or "1 0 0”, generate TCP connection establishment message #2, and send TCP connection establishment message #2 to AS. For example, if the TCP connection establishment is initiated by the UE, UPF sets the three bit positions of AE, CWR and ECE in the TCP header of TCP connection establishment message #1 to "11 1", and generates TCP connection establishment message #2.
- UPF will set the three bit positions of AE, CWR and ECE in the TCP header of TCP connection establishment message #1 to "0 1 0", “0 1 1”, and “1 1 0 ” or “1 0 0”, generating TCP connection establishment message #2. If the three bit positions of AE, CWR and ECE are "0 1 0", it means that adding the ECN mark to the IP header of the TCP initial establishment message or TCP initial establishment confirmation message is not supported. If the three bit positions of AE, CWR and ECE are "0 1 1”, it means that UPF supports setting the ECN field of the IP header of the TCP initial establishment message or TCP initial establishment confirmation message to "01".
- the UPF determines whether the UE supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer according to the TCP connection establishment message #1. That is, UPF determines whether the values of the three bits AE, CWR and ECE in the TCP header of TCP connection establishment message #1 are "11 1", "0 1 0", “0 1 1”, “1 1 0” or "1 0 0".
- UPF determines that the UE does not support the ability to open network status information through the transport layer based on TCP connection establishment message #1, then UPF sets the three bits AE, CWR and ECE in the TCP header of TCP connection establishment message #1 to " 11 1", "0 1 0", “0 1 1”, “1 1 0” or "1 0 0", generating TCP connection establishment message #2. If UPF determines that the UE supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer based on TCP connection establishment message #1, UPF directly forwards TCP connection establishment message #1 to the AS, that is, TCP connection establishment message #2 is TCP connection establishment message #1 .
- TCP connection establishment message #3 is used to establish a TCP connection between the UE and the AS.
- the TCP connection is used to transmit the service flow to be monitored. If the TCP connection establishment is initiated by the UE, the TCP connection establishment message #3 is a response message to the TCP connection establishment message #2.
- the UPF determines whether the AS supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer according to the TCP connection establishment message #3. If the values of the three bits AE, CWR and ECE in TCP connection establishment message #3 are "11 1", “0 1 0", “0 1 1”, “1 1 0” or "1 0 0", then UPF determines that the AS supports the ability to expose network status information through the transport layer, and conversely UPF determines that the AS does not support the ability to expose network status information through the transport layer.
- the method 300 further includes: the UPF forwards the TCP connection establishment message #3 to the UE.
- S309 RAN sends network status information to UPF.
- the UPF receives network status information from the RAN.
- the RAN sends the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to the UPF according to the monitoring configuration information.
- the monitoring configuration information may include the identifier of the service flow to be monitored, such as the QoS flow identifier or the PDU session identifier.
- the monitoring configuration information received by the RAN includes a method of reporting network status information
- the method includes reporting network status information through the GTP-U layer header of the uplink data packet
- the RAN sends the network status information to the UPF, including : RAN sends an uplink data packet to UPF.
- the GTP-U layer of the uplink data packet includes network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the uplink data packet is a data packet received by the RAN from the UE, or a data packet generated by the RAN.
- the RAN sends the network status information to the UPF, including: RAN sends the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to the UPF through the SMF, that is, the RAN sends the network status information to the SMF through the AMF.
- the SMF then forwards the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to the UPF.
- the UPF receives at least one data packet from the AS.
- the AS sends at least one data packet to the UPF.
- the at least one data packet is a data packet in the service flow to be monitored.
- the at least one data packet may be received by the UPF before receiving the network status information, or may be received at a time when the network status information is received, or may be received after receiving the network status information.
- UPF determines the ECN mark of at least one data packet.
- UPF determines the ECN mark of at least one data packet by parsing the IP layer header of each data packet in at least one data packet.
- FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of the IP version 4 (IPv4) header of a data packet.
- IPv4 header of the data packet includes the following content: version (version), Internet header length (IHL), differentiated service code point (DSCP), ECN, data packet Total length, packet identification, flags, fragment offset, time to live, protocol, header checksum, source IP address, destination IP address and optional (options) field (if IHL>5).
- the data packet is a data packet that does not carry the ECN mark; if the value of the ECN field is "01”, then the data packet is a data packet marked with the ECT1 mark; if If the value of the ECN field is "10”, then the data packet carries the ECT0 mark; if the value of the ECN field is "11", the data packet carries the CE mark.
- UPF determines that the ECN mark of the 20 data packets is: a data packet carrying a CE mark. The number is 0, the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the CE mark is 0, the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the ECT1 mark is 40, and the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the ECT0 mark is 40.
- UPF can determine the ECN mark of at least one data packet. , so that after UPF receives TCP ACK#1 from the UE, it can send TCP ACK#2 to the AS based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored and the ECN mark of at least one data packet.
- the AS adds an ECN mark to at least one data packet to indicate that the AS supports the ability to feed back network status information through the transport layer, or to indicate network congestion.
- the ECN mark carried in at least one data packet is an ECT0 mark or an ECT1 mark
- at least one data packet may indicate that the AS supports the ability to feed back network status information through the transport layer.
- at least one data packet includes a data packet carrying a CE mark, the at least one data packet indicates network congestion.
- the UPF sends at least one data packet to the UE.
- the UE receives at least one data packet.
- UE sends TCP ACK#1 to UPF.
- UPF receives TCP ACK#1 from UE.
- the UE After receiving at least one data packet, the UE sends TCP ACK#1 (an example of the first transport layer feedback message) to the UPF.
- TCP ACK#1 an example of the first transport layer feedback message
- the UE After UPF sends at least one data packet to the UE, if the ACK flag in the TCP header of the received message from the UE is set to "1", then UPF determines that the message is TCP ACK#1.
- the UE can determine the ECN mark of at least one data packet and feed back the ECN mark of at least one data packet through TCP ACK#1.
- the UE can assign values to r.cep in the ACE field and r.ceb, r.e0b, and r.e1b in the optional field in the TCP header of TCP ACK#1, so that TCP ACK#1 can Indicates the ECN marking of at least one packet.
- the UE assigns r.cep a value of 0, r.ceb a value of 0, r.e0b a value of 40, and r.e1b a value of 40.
- TCP ACK#1 is received when UPF receives the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, or TCP ACK#1 is received after UPF receives the network information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the UPF generates information indicating network status according to the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the information used to indicate the network status includes at least one of the following: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of payload bits of the data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of payload bits of the data packets carrying the ECT1 mark, or the data carrying the ECT0 mark.
- the number of payload bits of the packet includes at least one of the following: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of payload bits of the data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of payload bits of the data packets carrying the ECT1 mark, or the data carrying the ECT0 mark.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status satisfies the following conditions: the ratio of the number of data packets carrying the CE mark determined based on the information used to indicate the network status to the number of at least one data packet is used to characterize the data to be monitored The network status of the business flow. The network status of the service flow to be monitored is determined based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the congestion level of the service flow to be monitored is determined to be 60% based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status satisfies the following conditions: The ratio of the number of CE marked packets to the number of at least one packet is 60%.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark is 12, and/or, the number of payload bits of the packet carrying the CE mark is 48.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the ECT1 mark is 32.
- the default remaining data packets are data packets carrying the CE mark, it can be equivalent to indicating according to The network status information determines that the number of packets carrying the CE mark is 12.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of payload bits of the data packets carrying the ECT1 mark and the ECT0 mark is both 16.
- the information used to indicate the network status determines that the number of packets carrying the CE mark is 12.
- the information that UPF can generate to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark is 12, the number of payload bits of the data packets carrying the CE mark is 48, and the payload of the data packets carrying the ECT1 mark and the ECT0 mark. The number of bits is 16.
- UPF executes S311, or TCP ACK#1 indicates the ECN mark of at least one data packet
- UPF generates an indication for indicating based on the ECN mark of at least one data packet and the network status information of the service flow to be monitored. Network status information.
- the congestion level of the service flow to be monitored is 60% based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the ECN mark of at least one data packet is: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark is 0, and the number of data packets carrying the CE mark is 0.
- the number of payload bits is 0, and the number of payload bits of the data packets carrying the ECT1 mark and the ECT0 mark is both 40.
- the information generated by the UPF for indicating the network status satisfies the following condition: the ratio of the number of data packets carrying the CE mark determined based on the information for indicating the network status to the number of at least one data packet is 60%.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark is 12, the number of payload bits of the data packets carrying the CE mark is 48, and the number of payload bits of the data packets carrying the ECT1 mark and ECT0 mark is 12. The numbers are all 16.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark is 12, the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the CE mark is 48, and the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the ECT1 mark is 0. , the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the ECT0 mark is 32.
- UPF sends TCP ACK#2 to AS.
- AS receives TCP ACK#2 from UPF.
- TCP ACK#2 sends TCP ACK#2 to the AS based on TCP ACK#1, and TCP ACK#2 includes information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- r.cep, r.ceb, r.e0b and r.e1b in the TCP ACK#1 sent by the UE to the UPF are not retrieved. value or takes the value 0.
- UPF assigns a value to one or more of r.cep, r.ceb, r.e0b, and r.e1b based on the generated information indicating the network status, and generates TCP ACK#2. Equivalently, UPF adds information indicating the network status to TCP ACK#1 and generates TCP ACK#2.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of packets carrying the CE mark is 12, then UPF assigns a value of 12 to r.cep in TCP ACK#1 and generates TCP ACK#2.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of payload bits of the data packets carrying the ECT1 mark and the ECT0 mark is both 16, then the UPF is both r.e0b and r.e1b in TCP ACK#1. Assign a value of 16 to generate TCP ACK#2.
- r.cep, r.ceb, r.e0b and r.e1b have values in the TCP ACK#1 sent by the UE to the UPF. .
- UPF modifies the value of one or more of r.cep, r.ceb, r.e0b and r.e1b based on the generated information indicating the network status, and generates TCP ACK#2. Equivalently, UPF modifies some fields in TCP ACK#1 and generates TCP ACK#2.
- method 300 may not execute S311.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: carrying CE
- the number of marked packets is 12, the number of payload bits of the packet carrying the CE mark is 48, and the number of payload bits of the packet carrying the ECT1 mark and the ECT0 mark is both 16, then UPF removes r in TCP ACK#1.
- the values of cep, r.ceb, r.e0b, and r.e1b are modified to 12, 48, 16, and 16 respectively, and TCP ACK#2 is generated.
- the AS After the AS receives TCP ACK#2 from UPF, it can determine the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on the information included in TCP ACK#2 to indicate the network status.
- the information included in TCP ACK#2 to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark.
- the destination is 12, that is, the value of r.cep in TCP ACK#2 is 12.
- AS determines that TCP ACK#2 corresponds to at least one data packet AS determines that TCP ACK#2 corresponds to at least one data packet.
- the ratio of the number of at least one data packet (20) determines the degree of congestion of the traffic flow to be monitored.
- the AS may determine the number of at least one data packet based on the acknowledgment number field in the TCP header of TCP ACK#2.
- the information included in TCP ACK#2 to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark is 12, the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the CE mark is 48, and the payload of the data packet carrying the ECT1 mark is 48.
- the number of bits is 16, and the number of payload bits of the data packet carrying the ECT0 mark is 16, that is, the values of r.cep, r.ceb, r.e0b, and r.e1b in TCP ACK#2 are 12, 48, and 16 respectively.
- the AS can determine the number of at least one data packet to be 20 based on the values of r.ceb, r.e0b and r.e1b, and determine the number of data packets carrying the CE mark to be 12 based on the value of r.cep. Then it is determined that the congestion level of the service flow to be monitored is 60%.
- TCP ACK#1 and TCP ACK#2 are the same.
- the AS determines the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on TCP ACK#2
- it can adjust the service parameters of the service flow to be monitored based on the network status of the service flow to be monitored, such as dynamically adjusting the code rate of the media service to realize network
- the rapid opening of status information ensures users' business experience and improves the effective utilization of network resources.
- the size of the serial number of each process does not mean the order of execution.
- the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not be applied to the implementation process of the embodiment of the present application. constitute any limitation.
- S309 may be executed before S310 or after S313, or S309 may be executed between S310 and S313.
- the UPF when the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is TCP, if the UPF obtains the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, it will generate an indication based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored. Information about the network status of the service flow to be monitored. Further, after UPF receives TCP ACK#1 from the UE, it analyzes some fields in TCP ACK#1 (i.e. r.cep, r.ceb) based on the information used to indicate the network status.
- TCP ACK#1 i.e. r.cep, r.ceb
- TCP ACK#2 includes instructions for the service flow to be monitored Information about the network status, so that the application server can determine the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on TCP ACK#2.
- the network status of the service flow to be monitored can be opened to the AS through the TCP layer, so that the AS can determine the network status of the service flow to be monitored according to the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the status adjusts the service parameters of the service flow to be monitored, such as adjusting the encoding configuration to adapt the media output bit rate to ensure the user's business experience and improve the effective utilization of network resources.
- Figure 6 shows a schematic flow chart of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application. Specifically, Figure 6 takes the QUIC protocol as the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored as an example to illustrate how to open the network status information of the service flow to be monitored through the transport layer according to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- the UPF As described in S230 in the method 200, there are three trigger conditions for the UPF to generate information indicating the network status based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the UPF generates information indicating the network status based on different trigger conditions. In this case, the steps included in the method 600 are also different.
- the method 600 may include S601 to S604, S611 and S612, S614 to S617.
- the method 600 may include S601 to S605, S611 and S612, and S614 to S617.
- method 600 may include S601 to S604, S606, S611 and S612 , S614 to S617.
- method 600 also includes S606 to S610.
- method 600 also includes S613.
- AF sends instruction information #1 to PCF.
- the PCF receives the indication information #1 from the AF.
- S601 may refer to the description in S301 of method 300.
- the instruction information #2 sent by the AF to the PCF can be used to instruct the ECN capability negotiation process between the intervening UE and the AS, or to instruct the L4S capability negotiation between the intervening UE and the AS. process.
- the external opening rules indicated by the instruction message #3 sent by the AF to the PCF include: using QUIC for ECN feedback, or using QUIC for L4S feedback.
- PCF generates PCC rules.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is the QUIC protocol
- the first transport layer feedback message is QUIC ACK.
- the content structure of QUIC ACK is as follows:
- the ECT0 count represents the number of data packets carrying the ECT0 mark
- the ECT1 count represents the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark
- the ECT-CE count represents the number of data packets carrying the CE mark.
- the network status information opening policy includes a method for detecting the first transport layer feedback message from the UE: if the type parameter in the frame format of the message from the UE is "0x02. .0x03", then the message is QUIC ACK, that is, the message is the first transport layer feedback message.
- the method of adding information indicating the network status in the first transport layer feedback message includes: modifying the value of one or more of the ECT0 count, the ECT1 count and the ECT-CE count, or adding the values of the ECT0 count, the ECT1 count and the ECT-CE count.
- One or more items in the ECT-CE count are assigned such that one or more items in the ECT0 count, ECT1 count, and ECT-CE count are used to indicate the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- PCF sends PCC rules to SMF.
- SMF receives PCC rules from PCF.
- S603 may refer to the description in S303 of method 300 above.
- the SMF sends monitoring configuration information to the RAN.
- the RAN receives the monitoring configuration information from the SMF.
- S604 may refer to the description in S304 of method 300 above.
- the method 600 also includes S605.
- S605 SMF sends network status information opening rules to UPF.
- UPF receives the network status information opening rules from SMF.
- S605 may refer to the description in S305 of method 300 above.
- the method 600 also includes S606 to S610.
- the UPF receives at least one data packet #1 from the AS.
- the AS sends at least one data packet #1 to the UPF.
- At least one data packet #1 is a data packet in the service flow to be monitored.
- UPF determines the ECN mark of at least one data packet #1.
- UPF determines the ECN mark of at least one data packet #1 by parsing the IP layer of each data packet #1 in the at least one data packet #1.
- the manner in which UPF determines the ECN mark of at least one data packet #1 may refer to the description in S311 of method 300 above.
- the ECN mark of at least one data packet #1 determined by UPF includes: the number of data packets #1 carrying the CE mark, the number of data packets #1 carrying the ECT1 mark, and the number of data packets #1 carrying the ECT0 mark in at least one data packet #1. Number of marked packet #1.
- the UPF may determine whether the AS supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer based on at least one data packet #1. If the value of the ECN field in the IP layer header of at least one packet #1 is "01", "10" or "11", then UPF determines that the AS supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, otherwise UPF determines AS does not support the ability to expose network state information through the transport layer.
- the UPF sends at least one data packet #1 to the UE.
- the UE receives at least one data packet #1 from the UPF.
- UE sends QUIC ACK#1 to UPF.
- UPF receives QUIC ACK#1 from UE.
- the UE After receiving at least one data packet #1, the UE sends QUIC ACK #1 (an example of a first transport layer data packet) for at least one data packet #1 to the UPF.
- QUIC ACK #1 an example of a first transport layer data packet
- UPF determines that the message is QUIC ACK#1.
- UPF sends QUIC ACK#2 to AS.
- AS receives QUIC ACK#2 from UPF.
- the UPF sends QUIC ACK#2 (an example of the second transport layer data packet) to the AS based on QUIC ACK#1.
- QUIC ACK#2 includes indication information indicating support for opening network status information through the transport layer.
- the AS determines the UE's ability to support opening network status information through the transport layer based on the indication information included in QUIC ACK#2 for indicating support for opening network status information through the transport layer. It should be understood that AS determines that the UE supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, which does not mean that the UE actually supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer. It is the AS's belief that the UE supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- the ECT0 count, ECT1 count and ECT-CE count represent the ECN mark of at least one packet #1
- the ECT0 count, ECT1 count and ECT-CE count are used to indicate Supports exposing network status information through the transport layer. That is, when UPF sends QUIC ACK#2 to AS based on QUICACK#1, it assigns values to the ECT0 count, ECT1 count and ECT-CE count in QUIC ACK#1 based on the ECN mark of at least one packet #1, and generates QUIC ACK#2. And send QUIC ACK#2 to AS.
- the ECN mark of at least one data packet #1 determined by UPF is: in at least one data packet #1: the number of data packet #1 carrying CE mark and ECT1 mark is 0, and the number of data packet #1 carrying ECT0 mark is 0 is 10, then UPF assigns a value of 10 to the ECT0 count and ECT1 count, and assigns a value of 0 to the ECT-CE count.
- UPF determines whether the UE supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer based on QUIC ACK#1, that is, UPF determines the ECT0 count, ECT1 count and Whether the value of the ECT-CE count represents the ECN mark of at least one packet #1. For example, if the value of ECT0 count and ECT1 count in QUIC ACK#1 is 10, and the value of ECT-CE count is 0, then UPF determines that the UE supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, then UPF directly converts QUIC ACK#1 is forwarded to AS, that is, QUIC ACK#2 is QUIC ACK#1.
- UPF will calculate the ECT0 count and ECT1 in QUIC ACK#1 based on the ECN mark of at least one packet #1.
- the count is assigned a value of 10
- the ECT-CE count is assigned a value of 0, and QUIC ACK#2 is generated.
- RAN sends network status information to UPF.
- the UPF receives network status information from the RAN.
- S611 may refer to the description in S309 of method 300 above.
- the UPF receives at least one data packet #2 from the AS.
- the AS sends at least one data packet #2 to the UPF.
- the at least one data packet #2 is a data packet in the service flow to be monitored. At least one data packet #2 may be received by the UPF before receiving the network status information, or may be received at a time when the network status information is received, or may be received after receiving the network status information.
- UPF determines the ECN mark of at least one data packet #2.
- the UPF determines the ECN marking of at least one packet #2 in the same manner as it determines the ECN marking of at least one packet #1.
- UPF determines the ECN mark of the 20 packets #2 by parsing the IP layer of each packet #2 as: the number of packets #2 carrying the CE mark is 0, the number of data packets #2 carrying the ECT1 mark is 10, and the number of data packets #2 carrying the ECT0 mark is 10.
- the UPF can determine at least one data The ECN mark of packet #2, so that after UPF receives QUIC ACK#3 from the UE, it can send QUIC ACK#4 to the AS based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored and the ECN mark of at least one packet #2.
- the AS adds an ECN mark to at least one data packet #2 to indicate that the AS supports the transmission layer The ability to feed back network status information or indicate network congestion.
- the ECN mark carried in at least one data packet #2 is an ECT0 mark or an ECT1 mark, then at least one data packet #2 may indicate that the AS supports The ability to feed back network status information through the transport layer. If at least one data packet #2 includes a data packet carrying a CE mark, the at least one data packet #2 indicates network congestion.
- UPF sends at least one data packet #2 to the UE.
- the UE receives at least one data packet #2.
- UE sends QUIC ACK#3 to UPF.
- UPF receives QUIC ACK#3 from UE.
- the UE After receiving at least one data packet #2, the UE sends QUIC ACK #3 (an example of the first transport layer feedback message) to the UPF.
- QUIC ACK #3 an example of the first transport layer feedback message
- the UPF After UPF sends at least one data packet #2 to the UE, if the type parameter in the frame format of the message received from the UE is "0x02..0x03", then UPF determines that the message is QUIC ACK#3.
- the UE can determine the ECN mark of at least one data packet #2 and feed back the ECN mark of at least one data packet #2 through QUIC ACK #3.
- the UE may assign values to the ECT0 count, ECT1 count and ECT-CE count of QUIC ACK#3, so that QUIC ACK#3 may indicate at least one ECN mark of packet #2.
- the UE counts 10 for ECT0 and ECT1, and assigns a value of 0 to the ECT-CE count.
- QUIC ACK#3 is received when UPF receives the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, or QUIC ACK#3 is received after UPF receives the network information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the UPF generates information indicating network status according to the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the information used to indicate the network status includes at least one of the following: the number of data packets #2 carrying the CE mark, the number of data packets #2 carrying the ECT1 mark, or the number of data packets #2 carrying the ECT0 mark.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status satisfies the following conditions: the ratio of the number of CE-marked data packets #2 determined based on the information used to indicate the network status to the number of at least one data packet #2 is expressed by It is used to represent the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the network status of the service flow to be monitored is determined based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the congestion level of the service flow to be monitored is determined to be 60% based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status satisfies the following conditions: The ratio of the number of CE marked packet #2 to the number of at least one packet #2 is 60%.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packets #2 carrying the CE mark is 12.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packets #2 carrying the ECT1 mark is 8, then by default the remaining data packets #2 are data packets #2 carrying the CE mark, which is equivalent to The number of data packets #2 carrying the CE mark can be determined to be 12 based on the information indicating the network status.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of packet #2 carrying the ECT1 mark and the number of ECT0 mark are both 4, which is equivalent to the case where the default remaining data packets are packet #2 carrying the CE mark. It can be determined that the number of data packets #2 carrying the CE mark is 12 based on the information indicating the network status.
- method 600 executes S613, or QUIC ACK #2 indicates the ECN mark of at least one data packet #2, then UPF determines the ECN mark of at least one data packet #2 and the network status information of the service flow to be monitored. Generates information indicating network status.
- the congestion level of the service flow to be monitored is 60% based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored
- the ECN mark of at least one packet #2 is: the number of packet #2 carrying the CE mark is 0, and the number of packet #2 carrying the ECT1
- the number of tagged and ECT0 tagged packets is both 10.
- the information generated by UPF for indicating the network status satisfies the following conditions: the number of data packets #2 carrying the CE mark determined based on the information for indicating the network status is consistent with at least one The ratio of the number of packets #2 is 60%.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packet #2 carrying the CE mark is 12, and the number of data packet #2 carrying the ECT1 mark and the ECT0 mark is both 4.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packets #2 carrying the CE mark is 12, the number of data packets #2 carrying the ECT1 mark is 0, and the number of data packets #2 carrying the ECT0 mark is 12. is 8.
- UPF sends QUIC ACK#4 to AS.
- AS receives QUIC ACK#4 from UPF.
- the UPF sends QUIC ACK#4 to the AS based on QUIC ACK#3, and QUIC ACK#4 includes information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the ECT0 count, ECT1 count and ECT-CE count in the QUIC ACK#3 sent by the UE to the UPF have no value or a value. is 0.
- UPF assigns a value to one or more of the ECT0 count, ECT1 count, and ECT-CE count based on the generated information indicating the network status, and generates QUIC ACK#4. Equivalently, UPF adds information indicating network status to QUIC ACK#3 to generate QUIC ACK#4.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of packet #2 carrying the CE mark is 12, then UPF assigns a value of 12 to the ECT-CE count in QUIC ACK#3 and generates QUIC ACK#4.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of packet #2 carrying the ECT1 mark and the ECT0 mark are both 4, then UPF assigns a value of 4 to both the ECT0 count and the ECT1 count in QUIC ACK #3. , generate QUIC ACK#4.
- the ECT0 count, ECT1 count and ECT-CE count in the QUIC ACK#3 sent by the UE to the UPF have values. Then UPF modifies the value of one or more of the ECT0 count, ECT1 count, and ECT-CE count based on the generated information indicating the network status, and generates QUIC ACK#4. Equivalently, UPF modifies some fields in QUIC ACK#3 to generate QUIC ACK#4.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: packet #2 carrying CE mark The number is 12, and the number of packet #2 carrying ECT1 mark and ECT0 mark is both 4, then UPF changes the values of ECT0 count, ECT1 count and ECT-CE count in QUCI ACK#3 to 4, 4, and ECT-CE respectively. 12. Generate QUIC ACK#4.
- the AS After the AS receives QUIC ACK#4 from UPF, it can determine the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on the information included in QUIC ACK#4 to indicate the network status.
- the information included in QUIC ACK#4 to indicate the network status includes: the number of packet #2 carrying the CE mark is 12, that is, the value of the ECT-CE count in QUIC ACK#4 is 12, then the AS determines When QUIC ACK#4 corresponds to at least one data packet #2, the AS determines the service flow to be monitored based on the ratio of the number of data packets #2 carrying the CE mark (12) to the number of at least one data packet #2 (20). Congestion level. For example, the AS can determine the number of at least one packet #2 based on the "ACK range count" in QUIC ACK #4.
- the information included in QUIC ACK#4 to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packets #2 carrying the CE mark is 12, and the number of data packets #2 carrying the ECT1 mark and the ECT0 mark is both 4, that is, QUIC
- the values of ECT0 count, ECT1 count and ECT-CE count in ACK#4 are 4, 4 and 12 respectively.
- AS can determine at least one packet #2 based on the values of ECT0 count, ECT1 count and ECT-CE count. The number is 20. According to the value of ECT-CE count, the number of packet #2 carrying CE mark is determined to be 12, and then the congestion process of the service flow to be monitored is determined. degree is 60%.
- the service parameters of the service flow to be monitored can be adjusted according to the network status of the service flow to be monitored, such as changing the code rate by dynamically adjusting the encoding configuration to Ensure users' business experience and improve the effective utilization of network resources.
- the size of the sequence number of each process does not mean the order of execution.
- the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not be applied to the implementation process of the embodiment of the present application. constitute any limitation.
- S611 may be executed before S612 or after S615, or S611 may be executed between S612 and S615.
- the UPF when the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is the QUIC protocol, if the UPF obtains the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, it generates a Information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored. Further, after UPF receives QUIC ACK#3 from the UE, some fields in QUIC ACK#3 (i.e., ECT0 count, ECT1 count and (one or more of the ECT-CE counts), or modify the values of some fields in QUIC ACK#3 to generate QUIC ACK#4, so that QUIC ACK#4 includes information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- some fields in QUIC ACK#3 i.e., ECT0 count, ECT1 count and (one or more of the ECT-CE counts
- modify the values of some fields in QUIC ACK#3 to generate QUIC ACK#4 so that QUIC ACK#4 includes information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the application server can determine the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on QUIC ACK#4.
- the network status of the service flow to be monitored can be opened to the AS through the QUIC layer, so that the AS can be based on the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the status adjusts the service parameters of the service flow to be monitored, such as dynamically adjusting the media encoding configuration to change the code rate, so as to ensure the user's business experience and improve the effective utilization of network resources.
- Figure 7 shows a schematic flow chart of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application. Specifically, Figure 7 takes the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored as RTP or RTCP as an example to illustrate how to open the network status information of the service flow to be monitored through the transport layer according to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- RTP transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored
- RTCP transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored through the transport layer according to the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- the UPF As described in S230 in the method 200, there are three trigger conditions for the UPF to generate information indicating the network status based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the UPF generates information indicating the network status based on different trigger conditions. In this case, the steps included in the method 700 are also different.
- the method 700 may include S701 to S704, S710 and S711, S713 to S716.
- the method 700 may include S701 to S705, S710 and S711, and S713 to S716.
- method 700 may include S701 to S704, S706, S710 and S711 , S713 to S716.
- method 700 also includes S707 to S709.
- method 700 also includes S712.
- AF sends instruction information #1 to PCF.
- the PCF receives the indication information #1 from the AF.
- S701 may refer to the description in S301 of method 300.
- the instruction information #2 sent by the AF to the PCF can be used to indicate the ECN capability negotiation process between the intervening UE and the AS, or to indicate the L4S capabilities of the intervening UE and the AS.
- the external opening rules indicated by the instruction message #3 sent by the AF to the PCF include: using RTP or RTCP for ECN feedback, or using RTP or RTCP for L4S feedback.
- PCF generates PCC rules.
- the first transport layer feedback message is an RTCP feedback report.
- Figure 8 shows a schematic format diagram of the RTCP feedback report, as shown in Figure 8 As shown in (a), the RTCP feedback report includes the following fields: version (version, V), padding bit (padding, P), feedback message type (feedback message type, FMT), data type (packet type, PT), length (length), packet sender’s synchronization source (SSRC of packet sender), media source synchronization source (SSRC of media source), feedback control information (FCI).
- FCI also includes the following parameters: extended highest sequence number, ECT(0) counter (Counter), ECT(1) counter, ECN-CE counter, not -ECT counter, lost packets counter, or duplication counter.
- the ECT(0) counter represents the number of data packets carrying the ECT0 mark
- the ECT(1) counter represents the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark
- the ECT-CE counter represents the number of data packets carrying the CE mark
- the not-ECT counter Indicates the number of packets that do not carry the ECN mark
- the packet loss counter indicates the number of packets lost
- the duplication counter indicates the number of duplicate packets.
- the network status information opening policy includes a method for detecting the first transport layer feedback message from the UE: if the PT field in the message from the UE is 205, Then the message is an RTCP feedback report, that is, the message is a first transport layer feedback message.
- ways of adding information indicating network status to the first transport layer feedback message include: modifying the value of the counter, or assigning a value to the counter, so that the counter is used to indicate the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the counter includes one or more of the following counters: ECT(0) counter, ECT(1) counter, ECN-CE counter, not-ECT counter, packet loss counter, or repeat counter.
- PCF sends PCC rules to SMF.
- SMF receives PCC rules from PCF.
- S703 may refer to the description in S303 of method 300 above.
- the SMF sends monitoring configuration information to the RAN.
- the RAN receives the monitoring configuration information from the SMF.
- S704 may refer to the description in S304 of method 300 above.
- the method 700 also includes S705.
- S705 SMF sends network status information opening rules to UPF.
- UPF receives the network status information opening rules from SMF.
- S705 may refer to the description in S305 of method 300 above.
- the method 700 also includes S706 to S709.
- S706 The UPF receives downlink session description protocol (session description protocol, SDP) information from the AS.
- SDP session description protocol
- the AS sends downlink SDP information to the UPF.
- the downlink SDP information is used by the AS and the UE to negotiate whether to support the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- the UPF may determine whether the AS supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer based on the downlink SDP information. If the downlink SDP information includes the parameter "ecn-capable-rtp", UPF determines that the AS supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer. Otherwise, UPF determines that the AS does not support the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- the UPF sends downlink SDP information to the UE.
- the UE receives the downlink SDP information from the UPF.
- S708 The UE sends uplink SDP information #1 to the UPF.
- UPF receives uplink SDP information #1 from the UE.
- the UE After receiving the downlink SDP information, the UE sends the uplink SDP information #1 (an example of the first transport layer data packet) to the UPF.
- Uplink SDP information #1 is used by the AS and the UE to negotiate whether to support the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- UPF sends uplink SDP information #2 to the AS.
- the AS receives uplink SDP information #2 from UPF.
- the UPF sends uplink SDP information #2 (an example of the second transport layer data packet) to the AS based on the uplink SDP information #1.
- the uplink SDP information #2 includes indication information indicating support for opening network status information through the transport layer.
- the AS determines the UE's ability to support opening network status information through the transport layer based on the indication information included in the uplink SDP information #2 for indicating support for opening network status information through the transport layer. It should be understood that AS determines that the UE supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, which does not mean that the UE actually supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer, but that AS believes that the UE supports the ability to open network status information through the transport layer.
- S710 RAN sends network status information to UPF.
- the UPF receives network status information from the RAN.
- S710 may refer to the description in S309 of method 300 above.
- the UPF receives at least one data packet from the AS.
- the AS sends at least one data packet to the UPF.
- the at least one data packet is a data packet in the service flow to be monitored.
- the at least one data packet may be received by the UPF before receiving the network status information, or may be received at the time of receiving the network status information. , or may be received after receiving network status information.
- UPF determines the ECN mark of at least one data packet.
- S712 can refer to the description in S613 of method 600 above.
- UPF can determine the ECN mark of at least one data packet. , so that after the UPF receives the RTCP feedback report #1 from the UE, it can send the RTCP feedback report #2 to the AS based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored and the ECN mark of at least one data packet.
- the AS adds an ECN mark to at least one data packet to indicate that the AS supports feedback through the transport layer.
- the ability to provide network status information or indicate network congestion For example, if the ECN mark carried in at least one data packet is an ECT0 mark or an ECT1 mark, then at least one data packet may indicate that the AS supports the ability to feed back network status information through the transport layer. If at least one data packet includes a data packet carrying a CE mark, the at least one data packet indicates network congestion.
- the UPF sends at least one data packet to the UE.
- the UE receives at least one data packet.
- the UE sends RTCP feedback report #1 to the UPF.
- UPF receives RTCP feedback report #1 from the UE.
- the UE After receiving at least one data packet, the UE sends RTCP feedback report #1 (an example of the first transport layer feedback message) to the UPF.
- RTCP feedback report #1 an example of the first transport layer feedback message
- the UPF determines that the message is RTCP feedback report #1.
- the UE can determine the ECN mark of at least one data packet and feed back the ECN mark of at least one data packet through RTCP feedback report #1.
- the UE may assign a value to the counter of RTCP feedback report #1, so that RTCP feedback report #1 may indicate the ECN mark of at least one data packet, and the counter includes one or more of the following counters: ECT(0) counter, ECT(1) counter, ECN-CE counter, not-ECT counter.
- the UE assigns a value of 10 to the ECT(0) counter and ECT(1) counter, assigns a value of 0 to the ECT-CE counter, and assigns a value of 0 to the not-ECT counter.
- the UE can assign a value to the packet loss counter according to the packet loss situation, and assign a value to the duplication counter according to the repeated packet reception situation.
- RTCP feedback report #1 is received when UPF receives the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, or RTCP feedback report #1 is received after UPF receives the network information of the service flow to be monitored. .
- the UPF generates information indicating network status according to the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the information used to indicate the network status includes at least one of the following: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark, the number of data packets carrying the ECT0 mark, the number of data packets not carrying the ECN mark, loss The number of packets, or the number of duplicate packets received.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status satisfies the following conditions: the ratio of the number of data packets carrying the CE mark determined based on the information used to indicate the network status to the number of at least one data packet is used to characterize the data to be monitored The network status of the service flow; or, the ratio of the number of lost packets determined based on the information indicating the network status to the number of at least one data packet is used to characterize the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the network status of the service flow to be monitored is determined based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the congestion level of the service flow to be monitored is determined to be 60% based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status satisfies the following conditions:
- the ratio of the number of CE-marked data packets to the number of at least one data packet is 60%; or, the ratio of the number of lost packets determined based on the information indicating the network status to the number of at least one data packet is 60%.
- the information generated by the UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark is 12.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark is 8.
- the default remaining data packets are data packets carrying the CE mark
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of lost packets is 12.
- the information UPF may generate to indicate the network status includes: the number of lost packets is 12, and the number of packet #2 carrying the ECT1 mark and the ECT0 mark is both 4.
- the UPF executes S712, or the RTCP feedback includes #1 indicating the ECN mark of at least one data packet
- the UPF generates the ECN mark for the service flow to be monitored based on the ECN mark of the at least one data packet and the network status information of the service flow to be monitored. Information indicating network status.
- the congestion level of the service flow to be monitored is 60% based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored
- the ECN mark of at least one data packet is: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark is 0, the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark and the ECT0 mark is The number of data packets is 10, and the number of data packets not carrying the ECN mark is 0.
- the information generated by UPF for indicating the network status satisfies the following conditions: the ratio of the number of data packets carrying the CE mark determined based on the information used for indicating the network status to the number of at least one data packet is 60%; or, according to the user The ratio of the number of lost packets determined by the information indicating the network status to the number of at least one data packet is 60%.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark is 12, the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark and the ECT0 mark is both 4, and the number of data packets not carrying the ECN mark is 0. .
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of lost packets is 12, the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark is 0, the number of data packets carrying the ECT0 mark is 8, and the number of data packets not carrying the ECN mark is is 0.
- UPF sends RTCP feedback report #2 to AS.
- the AS receives RTCP feedback report #2 from UPF.
- the UPF sends an RTCP feedback report #2 to the AS based on the RTCP feedback report #1, and the RTCP feedback report #2 includes information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the counter in the RTCP feedback report #2 sent by the UE to the UPF has no value or has a value of 0, and the counter includes the following counters: One or more of: ECT(0) counter, ECT(1) counter, ECN-CE counter, not-ECT counter, packet loss counter, or repeat counter.
- UPF assigns a value to the counter based on the generated information indicating the network status, and generates RTCP feedback report #2. Equivalently, UPF adds information indicating the network status to RTCP feedback report #1 and generates RTCP feedback report #2.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of packets carrying the CE mark is 12, then UPF assigns a value of 12 to the ECT-CE counter in RTCP feedback report #1 and generates RTCP feedback report #2.
- the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of lost packets is 12, and the number of packet #2 carrying ECT1 mark and ECT0 mark is both 4, then UPF is the ECT in RTCP feedback report #1 The (0) counter and the ECT(1) counter are both assigned a value of 4, the packet loss counter is assigned a value of 12, and RTCP feedback report #2 is generated.
- the counter in RTCP feedback report #1 sent by the UE to the UPF has a value. Then UPF modifies the value of the counter based on the generated information indicating the network status, and generates RTCP feedback report #2. Equivalently, UPF modifies some fields in RTCP feedback report #1 and generates RTCP feedback report #2.
- RTCP feedback report #1 For example, if the values of the ECT(0) counter, ECT(1) counter, ECN-CE counter, not-ECT counter, packet loss counter, and repetition counter in RTCP feedback report #1 are 10, 10, 0, 0, respectively 0, 0, the information generated by UPF to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark is 12, and the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark and ECT0 mark is both 4, then UPF will report RTCP feedback #1 The values of the ECT(0) counter, ECT(1) counter, and ECN-CE counter in are modified to 4, 4, and 12 respectively, and RTCP feedback report #2 is generated.
- the AS After the AS receives the RTCP feedback report #2 from the UPF, it can determine the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on the information used to indicate the network status included in the RTCP feedback report #2.
- the information included in RTCP feedback report #2 to indicate the network status includes: the number of data packets carrying the CE mark is 12, that is, the value of the ECT-CE counter in RTCP feedback report #2 is 12, then the AS determines When RTCP feedback report #2 corresponds to at least one data packet, the AS determines the congestion level of the service flow to be monitored based on the ratio of the number of data packets carrying the CE mark (12) to the number of at least one data packet (20).
- the information included in RTCP feedback report #2 to indicate the network status includes: the number of lost packets is 12, the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark and the ECT0 mark is both 4, and the number of data packets carrying the CE mark is 0. , the number of data packets that do not carry the ECN mark is 0, and the number of repeatedly received data packets is 0, that is, the ECT(0) counter, ECT(1) counter, ECN-CE counter, and not- in RTCP feedback report #2
- the values of the ECT counter, packet loss counter, and repetition counter are 4, 4, 0, 0, 12, and 0 respectively.
- the AS can determine that the number of at least one data packet is 20 and the number of lost packets is 12 based on the counter values. Then it is determined that the packet loss rate (or congestion degree) of the service flow to be monitored is 60%.
- RTCP feedback report #1 in addition to one or more of the ECT(0) counter, ECT(1) counter, ECN-CE counter, not-ECT counter, packet loss counter, and duplicate counter, RTCP feedback report #1 and RTCP feedback The remaining fields of report #2 are the same.
- the AS determines the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on RTCP feedback report #2, it can adjust the service parameters of the service flow to be monitored based on the network status of the service flow to be monitored, such as dynamically adjusting the media encoding configuration to change the code rate. , to ensure users’ business experience and improve the effective utilization of network resources.
- S710 may be executed before S711 or after S714, or S710 may be executed between S711 and S714.
- the UPF when the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is the RTP or RTCP protocol, if the UPF obtains the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, it generates a Information used to indicate the network status of the service flow to be monitored. Further, after receiving the RTCP feedback report #1 from the UE, the UPF assigns one or more counters in the RTCP feedback report #1 based on the information used to indicate the network status. , or modify the value of one or more counters to generate RTCP feedback report #2, so that RTCP feedback report #2 includes information indicating the network status of the service flow to be monitored, so that the application server can determine based on RTCP feedback report #2 The network status of the service flow to be monitored.
- the UPF when the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is the RTP or RTCP protocol, if the UPF obtains the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, it generates a Information used to indicate the network status of the service flow to be monitored. Further, after receiving the
- the network status of the service flow to be monitored can also be opened to the AS through RTP or RTCP, so that the AS can adjust the service parameters of the service flow to be monitored according to the network status of the service flow to be monitored, such as Dynamically adjust the media encoding configuration to change the bit rate to ensure user business experience and improve the effective utilization of network resources.
- Figure 9 shows a schematic flow chart of the communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application. The various steps included in the method 900 are described in detail below.
- AF sends instruction information #1 to PCF.
- the PCF receives the indication information #1 from the AF.
- indication information #1 please refer to S301 of method 300 above.
- PCF generates PCC rules.
- the PCC rules include the monitoring policy of the service flow to be monitored.
- the monitoring policy of the service flow to be monitored is used to determine the monitoring configuration information of the service flow to be monitored.
- For the monitoring configuration information please refer to the description in S210 of method 200 above.
- the monitoring strategy may refer to the descriptions in S210 of method 200 and S302 of method 300 above.
- the PCC rules also include a network status information opening policy.
- the network status information opening policy includes one or more of the following: a method of receiving network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the RAN, or a method for indicating that the network status information is opened according to the service to be monitored.
- the network status information of the flow adds CE mark indication information in at least one data packet. At least one data packet is a data packet in the service flow to be monitored.
- PCF sends PCC rules to SMF.
- SMF receives PCC rules from PCF.
- S903 may refer to the description in S303 of method 300 above.
- the SMF sends monitoring configuration information to the RAN.
- the RAN receives the monitoring configuration information from the SMF.
- S904 may refer to the description in S304 of method 300 above.
- the method 900 also includes S905.
- S905 SMF sends network status information opening rules to UPF.
- UPF receives the network status information opening rules from SMF.
- the network status information opening rules include: a method of receiving network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the RAN, or indication information used to indicate external opening rules.
- S906 RAN sends network status information to UPF.
- the UPF receives network status information from the RAN.
- S906 may refer to S309 in method 300 above.
- method 900 is described by taking the UPF receiving network status information of the service flow to be monitored from the RAN as an example. If the UPF receives the monitoring configuration information of the service flow to be monitored, the UPF can also monitor the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on the monitoring configuration information, thereby obtaining the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- S907 AS sends at least one data packet to UPF.
- UPF receives at least one data packet from the AS.
- the at least one data packet is a data packet in the service flow to be monitored.
- the at least one data packet may be received by the UPF at the time when it receives the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, or it may be the network that receives the service flow to be monitored. Status information is received after.
- the UPF after receiving the network status information of the service flow to be monitored and at least one data packet, the UPF adds a CE mark to at least one data packet according to the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the UPF receives the After the network status information of the service flow to be monitored and at least one data packet are obtained, a CE mark is added to at least one data packet according to the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- UPF adds a CE mark to the IP header of at least one data packet, that is, UPF sets the ECN field of the IP header of at least one data packet to "11".
- UPF probabilistically adds a CE mark to at least one data packet based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored.
- the probability that UPF adds a CE mark to at least one data packet is determined based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored. For example, if UPF determines that there is no congestion in the service flow to be monitored based on network status information, UPF does not add a CE mark to each data packet in at least one data packet. That is, the probability that UPF adds a CE mark to at least one packet is 0. For another example, if UPF determines that the service flow to be monitored is congested based on network status information, UPF adds a CE mark to each data packet in at least one data packet.
- the probability of UPF adding a CE mark to at least one data packet is 100%.
- UPF determines that the congestion level of the service flow to be monitored is 60% based on the congestion information
- UPF randomly adds a CE mark to 60% of at least one data packet, that is, UPF adds a CE mark to at least one data packet.
- the probability of CE marking is 60%.
- UPF determines that the congestion level of the service flow to be monitored is 60% based on the network status information, UPF randomly adds CE marks to 12 data packets.
- the UPF sends at least one data packet to the UE.
- the UE receives at least one data packet from the UPF.
- S910 The UE sends a transport layer feedback message to the AS.
- the AS receives the transport layer feedback message from the UE.
- the UE After receiving at least one data packet from the UPF, the UE determines the ECN mark of the at least one data packet by parsing the IP layer of the at least one data packet, and carries the ECN mark of the at least one data packet in the transport layer feedback message and sends it to the AS.
- the UE counts the number of data packets carrying the CE mark and the number of payload bits in at least one data packet, the number of payload bits of the data packets carrying the ECT1 mark, and the number of payload bits carrying the ECT0 mark.
- the number of payload bits of the data packet and then the UE assigns values to r.cep, r.ceb, r.e1b and r.e0b in the TCP ACK based on the statistical results, and then sends the TCP ACK to the AS.
- the UE counts the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark, and the number of data packets carrying the ECT0 mark in at least one data packet. , and then the UE assigns the ECT0 count, ECT1 count and ECT-CE count in the QUIC ACK based on the statistical results, and then sends the QUIC ACK to the AS.
- the transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored is the QUIC protocol
- the UE counts the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark, and the number of data packets carrying the ECT0 mark in at least one data packet. , and then the UE assigns the ECT0 count, ECT1 count and ECT-CE count in the QUIC ACK based on the statistical results, and then sends the QUIC ACK to the AS.
- the UE counts the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark, and the number of data packets carrying the ECT0 mark in at least one data packet. The number of data packets, the number of data packets that do not carry the ECN mark, the number of lost packets and the number of duplicate data packets, and then the UE responds to the ECT(0) counter, ECT(1) counter, and ECT-CE in the RTCP feedback report based on the statistical results. After the counter, not-ECT counter, packet loss counter and duplication counter are assigned, the RTCP feedback report is sent to the AS.
- RTP transport layer protocol used by the service flow to be monitored
- RTCP the UE counts the number of data packets carrying the CE mark, the number of data packets carrying the ECT1 mark, and the number of data packets carrying the ECT0 mark in at least one data packet. The number of data packets, the number of data packets that do not carry the ECN mark, the number of lost packets and the number of
- the AS After receiving the transport layer feedback message, the AS can determine the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on the transport layer feedback message.
- the way in which the AS determines the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on the transport layer feedback message can refer to S315 of method 300, S617 of method 600, and S716 of method 700 above.
- the UPF obtains the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, it adds a CE mark to at least one data packet based on the network status information of the service flow to be monitored, and sends at least one data packet to the UE. Furthermore, the UE counts the ECN mark of at least one data packet, and feeds the statistical results back to the AS through the transport layer feedback message, so that the AS can determine the network status of the service flow to be monitored based on the ECN mark of at least one data packet.
- the RAN can send the network status information of the service flow to be monitored to the UPF, and then the UPF opens the network status information to the AS by adding a CE mark to at least one data packet.
- the RAN adds an ECN mark to the IP layer header of downlink data packets to open network status information, security is higher because RAN does not need to parse the IP layer header of downlink data packets.
- FIG. 10 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 1000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device 1000 may include: a transceiver unit 1010 and a processing unit 1020 .
- the communication device 1000 may be a user plane network element in the above method embodiment, or may be a chip used to implement the functions of the user plane network element in the above method embodiment.
- the communication device 1000 may correspond to the user plane network element in the method 200, the method 300, the method 600, the method 700 or the method 900 in the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a method for executing the method 200 in Figure 2 , the unit of the method executed by the user plane network element in the method 300 in Figure 3, the method 600 in Figure 6, the method 700 in Figure 7, or the method 900 in Figure 9.
- each unit in the communication device 1000 and the above-mentioned other operations and/or functions are respectively used to implement the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, the method 600 in FIG. 6, the method 700 in FIG. 7, or the method shown in FIG.
- the communication device 1000 may be the session management network element in the above method embodiment, or may be a chip used to implement the functions of the session management network element in the above method embodiment.
- the communication device 1000 may correspond to the session management network element in the method 200, the method 300, the method 600, the method 700 or the method 900 in the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a method for executing the method 200 in Figure 2 , the method unit executed by the session management network element in the method 300 in Figure 3, the method 600 in Figure 6, the method 700 in Figure 7, or the method 900 in Figure 9.
- each unit in the communication device 1000 and the above-mentioned other operations and/or functions are respectively used to implement the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, the method 600 in FIG. 6, the method 700 in FIG. 7, or the method shown in FIG.
- the communication device 1000 may be the policy control function network in the above method embodiment, or may be a chip used to implement the functions of the policy control function network in the above method embodiment.
- the communication device 1000 may correspond to the method 200, the method 300, the method 600, and the method in the embodiments of the present application.
- the communication device 1000 may include a policy control function network element in the method 700 or the method 900.
- the communication device 1000 may include a method for executing the method 200 in Figure 2, the method 300 in Figure 3, the method 600 in Figure 6, the method 700 in Figure 7, or
- the policy control function network in method 900 in Figure 9 is a unit of the method executed.
- each unit in the communication device 1000 and the above-mentioned other operations and/or functions are respectively used to implement the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, the method 600 in FIG. 6, the method 700 in FIG. 7, or the method shown in FIG.
- the communication device 1000 may be the application server in the above method embodiment, or may be a chip used to implement the functions of the application server in the above method embodiment.
- the communication device 1000 may correspond to the application server in the method 200, the method 300, the method 600, the method 700 or the method 900 in the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may include a method for executing the method 200 in FIG. 2, FIG.
- each unit in the communication device 1000 and the above-mentioned other operations and/or functions are respectively used to implement the method 200 in FIG. 2, the method 300 in FIG. 3, the method 600 in FIG. 6, the method 700 in FIG. 7, or the method shown in FIG.
- transceiver unit 1010 or the processing unit 1020 in the communication device 1000 may be called an acquisition unit, or the unit in which the transceiver unit 1010 and the processing unit 1020 are combined is called an acquisition unit.
- transceiver unit 1010 in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the transceiver 2020 in the communication device 2000 shown in FIG. 11
- processing unit 1020 in the communication device 1000 may correspond to the communication device shown in FIG. 11 Processors in 2000 and 2010.
- the chip when the communication device 1000 is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit.
- the chip may also include a processing unit.
- the transceiver unit may be an input-output circuit or a communication interface; the processing unit may be a processor or microprocessor or integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
- the transceiver unit 1010 is used to implement the signal transceiver operation of the communication device 1000
- the processing unit 1020 is used to implement the signal processing operation of the communication device 1000 .
- the communication device further includes a storage unit 1030, which is used to store instructions.
- Figure 11 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 2000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device 2000 includes: at least one processor 2010 and a transceiver 2020.
- the processor 2010 is coupled to the memory and is used to execute instructions stored in the memory to control the transceiver 2020 to send signals and/or receive signals.
- the communication device 2000 further includes a memory 2030 for storing instructions.
- processor 2010 and the memory 2030 can be combined into one processing device, and the processor 2010 is used to execute the program code stored in the memory 2030 to implement the above functions.
- the memory 2030 can also be integrated in the processor 2010 or independent of the processor 2010 .
- the transceiver 2020 may include a receiver and a transmitter.
- the transceiver 2020 may further include an antenna, and the number of antennas may be one or more.
- the transceiver 2020 can be an antenna interface or an interface circuit.
- the chip When the communication device 2000 is a chip, the chip includes a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
- the transceiver unit may be an input-output circuit or a communication interface;
- the processing unit may be a processor, microprocessor, or integrated circuit integrated on the chip.
- FIG 12 is a schematic diagram of a chip system according to an embodiment of the present application.
- the chip system here may also be a system composed of circuits.
- the chip system 3000 shown in Figure 12 includes: a logic circuit 3010 and an input/output interface (input/output interface) 3020.
- the logic circuit is used to couple with the input interface and transmit data through the input/output interface to execute the figure. 2.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a processing device, including a processor and an interface.
- the processor may be used to execute the method in the above method embodiment.
- the above processing device may be a chip.
- the processing device may be a field programmable gate array (FPGA), an application specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or a system on chip (SoC), or It can be a central processing unit (CPU), a network processor (NP), a digital signal processing circuit (DSP), or a microcontroller unit , MCU), it can also be a programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chip.
- FPGA field programmable gate array
- ASIC application specific integrated circuit
- SoC system on chip
- CPU central processing unit
- NP network processor
- DSP digital signal processing circuit
- MCU microcontroller unit
- PLD programmable logic device
- each step of the above method can be completed by instructions in the form of hardware integrated logic circuits or software in the processor.
- the steps of the methods disclosed in conjunction with the embodiments of the present application may be executed by a hardware processor, or may be executed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
- the software module can be located in a random register, flash memory, read-only memory, programmable read-only memory, or electrically erasable programmable memory, register, or other mature storage media in this field.
- the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware. To avoid repetition, the details will not be described here.
- the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
- each step of the above method embodiment can be completed through an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
- the above-mentioned processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP), an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), a field-programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, or discrete hardware components.
- DSP digital signal processor
- ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
- FPGA field-programmable gate array
- a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor, etc.
- non-volatile storage can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable ROM (PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically removable memory. Erase electrically programmable read-only memory (EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory can be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
- RAM random access memory
- the present application also provides a computer program product.
- the computer program product includes: computer program code.
- the computer program code When the computer program code is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute Figures 2, 3, The method of any one of the embodiments shown in Figure 6, Figure 7 or Figure 9.
- the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium.
- the computer-readable storage medium stores program code.
- the program code When the program code is run on a computer, it causes the computer to execute FIG. 2 and FIG. 3.
- this application also provides a system, which includes the aforementioned application server and user plane network element.
- the system also includes the aforementioned session management network element.
- the system also includes the aforementioned policy control network element.
- the above embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
- software When implemented using software, they may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
- the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
- the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
- the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that contains one or more available media integrated.
- the usable media may be magnetic media (e.g., floppy disks, hard disks, tapes), optical media (e.g., high-density digital video discs (DVD)), or semiconductor media (e.g., solid state disks, SSD)) etc.
- magnetic media e.g., floppy disks, hard disks, tapes
- optical media e.g., high-density digital video discs (DVD)
- DVD digital video discs
- semiconductor media e.g., solid state disks, SSD
- the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
- the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
- the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
- multiple units or components may be combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented.
- the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection between each other shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Signal Processing (AREA)
- Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
- Data Exchanges In Wide-Area Networks (AREA)
Abstract
本申请实施例提供了一种通信方法及通信装置。根据本申请的方法,用户面网元获取到待监测业务流的网络状态信息,则用户面网元根据从终端设备接收的第一传输层反馈消息向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息,第二传输层反馈消息包括用于指示网络状态的信息,从而应用服务器可以根据第二传输层反馈消息确定待监测业务流的网络状态。由于用户面网元向应用服务器发送的第二传输层反馈消息包括用于指示网络状态的信息,因此,即使在终端设备不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的情况下,也可以实现通过传输层向应用服务器开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
Description
本申请要求于2022年04月27日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为202210454309.2、申请名称为“通信方法及通信装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
本申请实施例涉及通信领域,并且更具体地,涉及一种通信方法及通信装置。
如果第三方应用能实时地感知网络状态,那么第三方应用可以根据网络状态进行相应调整,从而保证用户的业务体验,以及最大化网络利用效率。比如,在媒体应用中,应用侧需要根据网络状态实时地进行码率调整,从而避免网络状态变化带来的用户体验下降。因此如何将更多的网络状态信息,诸如可用带宽、拥塞状况等快速开放给第三方应用服务器是一个关键问题,尤其是对于扩展现实(extended reality,XR)、云游戏等实时业务中。
一种实现方式中,无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)可以监测RAN与用户设备(user equipment,UE)之间空口的网络拥塞状况,并通过在下行数据包的网际协议(internet protocol,IP)头部携带显示拥塞通知(explicitcongestionnotification,ECN)标记的方式将RAN与UE之间的网络状态信息开放出去。具体地,RAN在下行数据包的IP头部携带ECN标记,并将下行数据包发送给UE。UE统计接收到的至少一个下行数据包中携带ECN标记的下行数据包的数目和/或携带ECN标记的下行数据包的负载比特数,并通过传输层反馈机制将统计结果发送给应用服务器侧,从而使得第三方应用可以获得网络状态。
然而在上述方式中,若UE不支持通过传输层反馈机制将统计结果发送给应用服务器侧,则第三方应用服务器无法快速获得网络状态。而且,由于RAN所处的位置相对于核心网网元更接近用户侧,具有被物理破坏的可能性,因此由RAN解析下行数据包的IP层并在下行数据包的IP头部携带ECN标记将会存在一定的安全隐患。最后,上述方式中RAN将网络状态信息发往UE侧,再由UE侧发往应用服务器侧,更长的传输链路难以保障网络状态信息的快速实时开放。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,以期优化通过传输层向应用服务器反馈网络状态信息的方式。
第一方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法包括:用户面网元获取待监测业务流的网络状态信息;该用户面网元接收来自终端设备的第一传输层反馈消息,该第一传输层反馈消息与该待监测业务流中的至少一个数据包对应;该用户面网元根据该第一传输层反馈消息
向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息,该第二传输层反馈消息包括用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态的信息。
基于上述技术方案,用户面网元获取到待监测业务流的网络状态信息,以及从终端设备接收到第一传输层反馈消息之后,根据第一传输层反馈消息向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息,第二传输层反馈消息包括用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,从而应用服务器可以根据第二传输层反馈消息确定待监测业务流的网络状态。从而使得应用服务器可以根据待监测业务流的网络状态调整待监测业务流的业务参数,如动态调整媒体编码配置以改变码率,以保证用户的业务体验,提升网络资源的有效利用率。
此外,根据本申请实施例提供的方法,接入网设备可以将待监测业务流的网络状态信息发送给用户面网元,再由用户面网元通过传输层开放给应用服务器。相比于接入网设备通过在上行/下行数据包的网际协议(internet protocol,IP)层头部添加显示拥塞通知(explicitcongestionnotification,ECN)标记以开放网络状态信息的方式,由于不需要接入网设备解析下行数据包的IP层头部,因此安全性更高。而且网络状态信息不需要发送到终端设备,再由终端设备发送至应用服务器侧,可以实现更加快速地网络状态信息的反馈。
此外,由于用户面网元向应用服务器发送的第二传输层反馈消息包括用于指示网络状态的信息。从而使得在不考虑终端设备能力的情况下,根据本申请实施例提供的方法也可以实现通过传输层向应用服务器开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息。避免终端设备不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力时,无法向应用服务器开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息,从而无法由应用进行动态调整从而影响用户体验的问题。
其中,该用户面网元根据第一传输层反馈消息向应用服务器发送该第二传输层反馈消息,包括:该用户面网元在第一传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息生成第二传输层反馈消息;或者,该用户面网元通过修改第一传输层反馈消息中部分字段的取值生成第二传输层反馈消息。需要说明的是,第一传输层反馈消息与第二传输层反馈消息的源地址相同,即第一传输层反馈消息与第二传输层反馈消息的源地址都是终端设备的地址。
基于上述技术方案,用户面网元在第一传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息生成第二传输层反馈消息,或者,通过修改第一传输层反馈消息中部分字段的取值生成第二传输层反馈消息,使得第二传输层反馈消息包括用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,相当于用户面网元辅助终端设备通过传输层向应用服务器开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息,从而使得在不考虑终端设备能力的情况下,根据本申请实施例提供的方法也可以实现通过传输层向应用服务器开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
示例性的,该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是传输控制协议(transport control protocol,TCP),该用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息包括以下至少一项:携带拥塞经历(congestion experienced,CE)标记的数据包的数目、携带CE标记的数据包的负载比特数、携带显示拥塞通知能力传输(ECN capable transport,ECT)1标记的数据包的负载比特数、或携带ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数。
又示例性的,该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是快速用户数据报协议(user datagram protocol,UDP)互联网连接(quick UDP Internet connection,QUIC)协议,该用于指示该待监测业务流的网络信息的信息包括以下至少一项:携带CE标记的数据包的数目、携
带ECT1标记的数据包的数目、或携带ECT0标记的数据包的数目。
再示例性的,该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是实时传输协议(real-time transport protocol,RTP)或实时传输控制协议(real-time transport control protocol,RTCP),该用于确定该待监测业务流的网络信息的信息包括以下至少一项:携带ECT1标记的数据包的数目、携带ECT0标记的数据包的数目、携带CE标记的数据包的数目、丢包数目、重复收到的数据包的数目、或未携带ECN标记的数据包的数目。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法进一步包括:该用户面网元根据该待监测业务流的网络状态信息以及根据该至少一个数据包的ECN标记(ECN mark,或ECN lable),生成该用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态的信息。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该用户面网元接收来自该应用服务器的该至少一个数据包;该用户面网元确定该至少一个数据包的ECN标记。即用户面网元接收来自该应用服务器的至少一个数据包并统计该至少一个数据包的ECN标记。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该用户面网元从该第一传输层反馈消息中获取该至少一个数据包的ECN标记。
基于上述技术方案,若终端设备支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力,则终端设备接收到至少一个数据包之后,可以统计至少一个数据包的ECN标记,并在第一传输层反馈消息中添加至少一个数据包的ECN标记,使得用户面网元可以获取到至少一个数据包的ECN标记。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该用户面网元接收来自该终端设备的第一传输层数据包,该第一传输层数据包与该待监测业务流对应;该用户面网元根据该第一传输层数据包向该应用服务器发送第二传输层数据包,该第二传输层数据包包括用于指示支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的指示信息。
基于上述技术方案,用户面网元向根据第一传输层数据包向应用服务器发送第二传输层数据包,从而应用服务器可以根据第二传输层数据包包括的指示信息确定终端设备支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息,从而应用服务器接收到第二传输层反馈消息之后,可以确定第二传输层反馈消息包括用于指示网络状态的信息。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该用户面网元确定该第一传输层数据包包括用于指示不支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的信息。
基于上述技术方案,用户面网元确定第一传输层数据包包括不支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的信息的情况下,用户面网元根据第一传输层数据包向应用服务器发送第二传输层数据包,可以减小用户面网元的资源消耗。例如,若第一传输层数据包包括支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的信息,则用户面网元可以直接将第一传输层数据包发送给应用服务器,而不必根据第一传输层数据包向应用服务器发送第二传输层数据包。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该用户面网元接收来自该终端的TCP连接建立消息;该用户面网元根据该TCP连接建立消息的TCP头部中的精准ECN(accurate ECN,AE)、拥塞窗口降低位(congestion window reduced,CWR)和ECN回应位(ECN echo,ECE)三个比特位的取值,确定该终端设备是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
例如,当AE、CWR和ECE三个比特位的取值为“11 1”、“0 1 0”、“0 1 1”、“1 1 0”或“1 0 0”时,用户面网元确定终端设备支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息,反之,用户面网元确定终端设备不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该用户面网元接收来自该终端设备的数据包;该用户面网元根据该数据包的IP头部的ECN字段的取值,确定该终端设备是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
例如,若数据包的IP层头部中的ECN字段的取值为“01”、“10”或“11”,则用户面网元确定终端设备支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,反之,用户面网元确定终端设备不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该用户面网元接收来自该终端设备上行会话描述协议信息;该用户面网元根据该上行会话描述协议信息,确定该终端设备是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
例如,若上行会话描述协议信息未包括参数“ecn-capable-rtp”,则用户面网元确定该终端设备不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,反之,用户面网元确定终端设备不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法进一步还包括:在该应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的情况下,该用户面网元根据该待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态的信息。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该用户面网元接收来自该应用服务器的TCP连接建立消息;该用户面网元根据该TCP连接建立消息的TCP头部中AE、CWR和ECE三个比特位的取值,确定该应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
基于上述技术方案,用户面网元可以在确定应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的情况下,生成用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,并向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息,从而可以避免不必要的资源消耗。例如,若用户面网元确定应用服务器不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则用户面网元不会生成用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,也不会向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息。
例如,当AE、CWR和ECE三个比特位的取值为“11 1”、“0 1 0”、“0 1 1”、“1 1 0”或“1 0 0”时,用户面网元确定应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该用户面网元接收来自该应用服务器的数据包;该用户面网元根据该数据包的IP头部的ECN字段的取值,确定该应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
基于上述技术方案,用户面网元可以在确定应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的情况下,生成用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,并向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息,从而可以避免不必要的资源消耗。例如,若用户面网元确定应用服务器不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则用户面网元不会生成用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,也不会向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息。
例如,若数据包的IP层头部中的ECN字段的取值为“01”、“10”或“11”,则用户面网元确定应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该用户面网元接收来自该应用服务器下行会话描述协议信息;该用户面网元根据该下行会话描述协议信息,确定该应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
基于上述技术方案,用户面网元可以在确定应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的情况下,生成用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,并向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息,从而可以避免不必要的资源消耗。例如,若用户面网元确定应用服务器不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则用户面网元不会生成用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,也不会向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息。
例如,若下行会话描述协议信息包括参数“ecn-capable-rtp”,则用户面网元确定应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该用户面网元接收来自会话管理网元的网络状态信息开放规则,该网络状态信息开放规则用于确定通过传输层开放该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式。
示例性的,该网络状态信息开放规则包括以下一项或多项:用于指示介入该终端设备与该应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息、用于指示该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议的指示信息、从该接入网设备接收该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、检测该第一传输层反馈消息的方式、或在该第一传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息的方式,该传输层能力协商流程用于确定是否支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息。
第二方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法包括:策略控制功能网元接收来自应用功能网元的用于指示通过传输层对外开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息的指示信息;该策略控制功能网元根据该用于指示通过传输层开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息的指示信息,确定该待监测业务流的监测策略和网络状态信息开放策略,该监测策略用于确定待监测业务流的监测配置信息,该监测配置信息用于监测该待监测业务流的网络状态,该网络状态信息开放策略用于确定网络状态信息开放规则,该网络状态信息开放规则用于确定通过传输层开放该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式;该策略控制功能网元向会话管理网元发送该监测策略和该网络状态信息开放策略。
基于上述技术方案,若策略控制功能网元接收到用于指示通过传输层开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息的指示信息,则策略控制功能网元确定监测策略和网络状态信息开放策略,并将监测策略和网络状态信息开放策略发送给会话管理网元,从而会话管理网元可以根据监测策略向接入网设备发送监测配置信息,以及根据网络状态信息开放策略向用户面网元发送网络状态信息开放规则,从而接入网设备可以根据监测配置信息向用户面网元发送待监测业务流的网络状态信息,以及用户面网元根据网络状态信息开放规则确定通过传输层向应用服务器开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
示例性的,该网络状态信息开放策略或该网络状态信息开放规则包括以下一项或多项:用于指示介入该终端设备与该应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息、用于指示该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议的指示信息、从接入网设备接收该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、检测来自该终端设备的传输层反馈消息的方式、在该传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息的方式、或用于指示根据该待监测业务
流的网络状态信息在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记的指示信息,该传输层能力协商流程包括确定是否支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力的流程。
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该策略控制功能网元接收来自该应用功能网元的用于指示介入该终端设备与该应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息。
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该策略控制功能网元接收来自该应用功能网元的用于指示该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议的指示信息。
第三方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法包括:会话管理网元接收来自策略控制功能网元的待监测业务流的监测策略和网络状态信息开放策略;该会话管理网元根据该网络状态信息开放策略向用户面网元发送网络状态信息开放规则,该网络状态信息开放规则用于确定通过传输层开放该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式;该会话管理网元根据该监测策略向该接入网设备发送待监测业务流的监测配置信息,该监测配置信息用于监测该待监测业务流的网络状态。
基于上述技术方案,若会话管理网元接收到监测策略和网络状态信息开放策略,则会话管理网元可以根据监测策略向接入网设备发送监测配置信息,以及根据网络状态信息开放策略向用户面网元发送网络状态信息开放规则,从而接入网设备可以根据监测配置信息向用户面网元发送待监测业务流的网络状态信息,以及用户面网元根据网络状态信息开放规则确定通过传输层向应用服务器开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
示例性的,该网络状态信息开放策略或该网络状态信息开放规则包括以下一项或多项:用于指示介入该终端设备与该应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息、用于指示该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议的指示信息、从接入网设备接收该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、检测来自该终端设备的传输层反馈消息的方式、在该传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息的方式、或用于指示根据该待监测业务流的网络状态信息在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记的指示信息,该传输层能力协商流程包括确定是否支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力的流程。
第四方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法包括:应用服务器向策略控制功能网元发送用于指示通过传输层对外开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息的指示信息;该应用服务器发送该待监测业务流中的至少一个数据包;该应用服务器接收来自用户面网元的第二传输层反馈消息,该第二传输层反馈消息与该至少一个数据包对应,该第二传输层反馈消息包括用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息。
基于上述技术方案,应用服务器接收到的第二传输层反馈消息包括用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,第二传输层反馈消息根据终端设备发送的第一传输层反馈消息生成,因此应用服务器可以根据第二传输层反馈消息确定待监测业务流的网络状态。从而使得应用服务器可以根据待监测业务流的网络状态调整待监测业务流的业务参数,如相应调整媒体码率,以保证用户的业务体验,提升网络资源的有效利用率。
示例性的,该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是TCP,该用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息包括以下至少一项:携带CE标记的数据包的数目、携带CE标记的数据包的负载比特数、携带ECT1标记的数据包的负载比特数、或携带ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数。
又示例性的,该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是QUIC协议,该用于指示该待监测业务流的网络信息的信息包括以下至少一项:携带CE标记的数据包的数目、携带ECT1标记的数据包的数目、或携带ECT0标记的数据包的数目。
再示例性的,该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是RTP/RTCP,该用于确定该待监测业务流的网络信息的信息包括以下一项或多项:携带ECT1标记的数据包的数目、携带ECT0标记的数据包的数目、携带CE标记的数据包的数目、丢包数目、重复收到的数据包的数目、或未携带ECN标记的数据包的数目。
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该应用服务器向该策略控制功能网元发送用于指示介入该终端设备与该应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息,该传输层能力协商流程包括确定是否支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力的流程。
基于上述技术方案,应用服务器向策略控制功能网元发送用于指示介入该终端设备与该应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息,从而策略控制功能网元向会话管理网元发送网络状态信息开放策略可以包括上述指示信息,会话管理网元向用户面网元发送的网络状态信息开放规则也可以包括上述指示信息,从而用户面网元可以根据上述指示信息介入终端设备与应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程。例如,在终端设备不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的情况下,用户面网元代替终端设备向应用服务器发送用于指示支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的指示信息,从而可以实现通过传输层向应用服务器开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息。具体地,用户面网元通过监测终端设备与应用服务器之间的能力协商消息,确认终端设备不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,并会修改终端设备侧能力信息,代替终端设备与应用服务器进行能力协商。
结合第四方面,在第四方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该应用服务器向该策略控制功能网元发送用于指示该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议的指示信息。
基于上述技术方案,应用服务器向策略控制功能网元发送用于指示该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议的指示信息,并将该指示信息通过会话管理网元最终发送至用户面网元,确保用户面网元能够感知当前待监测业务所使用的的传输层协议类型,如TCP,RTP/RTCP等等。
第五方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法包括:用户面网元获取待监测业务流的网络状态信息;该用户面网元根据该待监测业务流的网络状态信息向终端设备发送该待监测业务流中的至少一个数据包,该至少一个数据包中携带CE标记的数据包的数量与该至少一个数据包的数量的比值用于确定该待监测业务流的网络状态。
基于上述技术方案,若用户面网元获取到待监测业务流的网络状态信息,则根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记,并将至少一个数据包发送给终端设备。进而,终端设备统计至少一个数据包的ECN标记,并通过传输层反馈消息将统计结果反馈给应用服务器,使得应用服务器可以根据至少一个数据包的ECN标记确定待监测业务流的网络状态。从而使得应用服务器根据待监测业务流的网络状态调整待监测业务流的业务参数,如进行媒体码率调整,以保证用户的业务体验,提升网络资源的有效利用率。
此外,根据本申请实施例提供的方法,接入网设备可以将待监测业务流的网络状态信
息发送给用户面网元,再由用户面网元通过在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记的方式将网络状态信息开放给应用服务器。相比于接入网设备通过在下行数据包的IP层头部添加ECN标记以开放网络状态信息的方式,由于不需要接入网设备解析下行数据包的IP层头部,因此安全性更高。
结合第五方面,在第五方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:该用户面网元接收来自会话管理网元的网络状态信息开放规则,该网络状态信息开放规则用于确定开放该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式,该网络状态信息开放规则包括以下一项或多项:从该接入网设备接收该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、或用于指示根据该待监测业务流的网络状态信息在该至少一个数据包中添加CE标记的指示信息。
第六方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置包括获取单元和收发单元,该获取单元用于获取待监测业务流的网络状态信息;该收发单元用于接收来自终端设备的第一传输层反馈消息,该第一传输层反馈消息与该待监测业务流中的至少一个数据包对应;该收发单元还用于根据该第一传输层反馈消息向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息,该第二传输层反馈消息包括该用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态的信息。
一种可能的实现方式中,该获取单元是收发单元,该收发单元具体用于接收来自接入网设备的待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该获取单元是处理单元,该处理单元具体用于根据待监测业务流的监测配置信息监测待监测业务流的网络状态,得到待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
示例性的,该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是TCP,该用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息包括以下至少一项:携带CE标记的数据包的数目、携带CE标记的数据包的负载比特数、携带ECT1标记的数据包的负载比特数、或携带ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数。
又示例性的,该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是QUIC协议,该用于指示该待监测业务流的网络信息的信息包括以下至少一项:携带CE标记的数据包的数目、携带ECT1标记的数据包的数目、或携带ECT0标记的数据包的数目。
再示例性的,该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是RTP/RTCP,该用于确定该待监测业务流的网络信息的信息包括以下至少一项:携带ECT1标记的数据包的数目、携带ECT0标记的数据包的数目、携带CE标记的数据包的数目、丢包数目、重复收到的数据包的数目、或未携带记ECN标记的数据包的数目。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,该通信装置还包括处理单元,该处理单元用于根据该待监测业务流的网络状态信息与该至少一个数据包的ECN标记,生成该用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态的信息。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元还用于接收来自该应用服务器的该至少一个数据包;该处理单元还用于确定该至少一个数据包的ECN标记。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,该处理单元还用于从该第一传输层反馈消息中获取该至少一个数据包的ECN标记。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元还用于接收来自该终端设备的第一传输层数据包,该第一传输层数据包与该待监测业务流对应;该收发单元还用于根据该第一传输层数据包向该应用服务器发送第二传输层数据包,该第二传输层数据包包
括用于指示支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的指示信息。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,该处理单元还用于确定该第一传输层数据包包括用于指示不支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的信息。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元还用于接收来自该终端的TCP连接建立消息;该处理单元还用于根据该TCP连接建立消息的TCP头部中的AE、CWR和ECE三个比特位的取值,确定该终端设备是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,该通信装置还包括处理单元,该收发单元用于接收来自该终端设备的数据包;该处理单元还用于根据该数据包的IP头部的ECN字段的取值,确定该终端设备是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元还用于接收来自该终端设备上行会话描述协议信息;该处理单元还用于根据该上行会话描述协议信息,确定该终端是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,该通信装置还包括处理单元,在该应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的情况下,该处理单元用于根据该待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态的信息。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元还用于接收来自该应用服务器的TCP连接建立消息;该处理单元还用于根据该TCP连接建立消息的TCP头部中的AE、CWR和ECE三个比特位的取值,确定该应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元还用于接收来自该应用服务器的数据包;该处理单元还用于根据该数据包的IP头部的ECN字段的取值,确定该应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元还用于接收来自该应用服务器下行会话描述协议信息;该处理单元还用于根据该下行会话描述协议信息,确定该应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
结合第六方面,在第六方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元还用于接收来自会话管理网元的网络状态信息开放规则,该网络状态信息开放规则用于确定通过传输层开放该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式。
示例性的,该网络状态信息开放规则包括以下一项或多项:用于指示介入该终端设备与该应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息、用于指示该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议的指示信息、从该接入网设备接收该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、检测该第一传输层反馈消息的方式、或在该第一传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息的方式,该传输层能力协商流程用于确定是否支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息。
第七方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置包括收发单元和处理单元,该收发单元用于接收来自应用功能网元的用于指示通过传输层对外开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息的指示信息;该处理单元用于根据该用于指示通过传输层开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息的指示信息,确定该待监测业务流的监测策略和网络状态信息开放策略,该监测策略
用于确定待监测业务流的监测配置信息,该监测配置信息用于监测该待监测业务流的网络状态,该网络状态信息开放策略用于确定网络状态信息开放规则,该网络状态信息开放规则用于确定通过传输层开放该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式;该收发单元还用于向会话管理网元发送该监测策略和该网络状态信息开放策略。
示例性的,该网络状态信息开放策略或该网络状态信息开放规则包括以下一项或多项:用于指示介入该终端设备与该应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息、用于指示该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议的指示信息、从接入网设备接收该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、检测来自该终端设备的传输层反馈消息的方式、在该传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息的方式、或用于指示根据该待监测业务流的网络状态信息在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记的指示信息,该传输层能力协商流程包括确定是否支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力的流程。
结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元还用于接收来自该应用功能网元的用于指示介入该终端设备与该应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息。
结合第七方面,在第七方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元还用于接收来自该应用功能网元的用于指示该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议的指示信息。
第八方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置包括收发单元,该收发单元用于接收来自策略控制功能网元的待监测业务流的监测策略和网络状态信息开放策略;该收发单元还用于根据该网络状态信息开放策略向用户面网元发送网络状态信息开放规则,该网络状态信息开放规则用于确定通过传输层开放该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式;该收发单元还用于根据该监测策略向该接入网设备发送待监测业务流的监测配置信息,该监测配置信息用于监测该待监测业务流的网络状态。
示例性的,该网络状态信息开放策略或该网络状态信息开放规则包括以下一项或多项:用于指示介入该终端设备与该应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息、用于指示该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议的指示信息、从接入网设备接收该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、检测来自该终端设备的传输层反馈消息的方式、在该传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息的方式、或用于指示根据该待监测业务流的网络状态信息在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记的指示信息,该传输层能力协商流程包括确定是否支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力的流程。
第九方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置包括收发单元,该收发单元用于向策略控制功能网元发送用于指示通过传输层对外开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息的指示信息;该收发单元还用于发送该待监测业务流中的至少一个数据包;该收发单元还用于接收来自用户面网元的第二传输层反馈消息,该第二传输层反馈消息与该至少一个数据包对应,该第二传输层反馈消息包括用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息。
示例性的,该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是TCP,该用于指示该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息包括以下至少一项:携带CE标记的数据包的数目、携带CE标记的数据包的负载比特数、携带ECT1标记的数据包的负载比特数、或携带ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数。
又示例性的,该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是QUIC协议,该用于指示该待监测业务流的网络信息的信息包括以下至少一项:携带CE标记的数据包的数目、携带ECT1
标记的数据包的数目、或携带ECT0标记的数据包的数目。
再示例性的,该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是RTP/RTCP,该用于确定该待监测业务流的网络信息的信息包括以下一项或多项:携带ECT1标记的数据包的数目、携带ECT0标记的数据包的数目、携带CE标记的数据包的数目、丢包数目、重复收到的数据包的数目、或未携带ECN标记的数据包的数目。
结合第九方面,在第九方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元还用于向该策略控制功能网元发送用于指示介入该终端设备与该应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息,该传输层能力协商流程包括确定是否支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力的流程。
结合第九方面,在第九方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元还用于向该策略控制功能网元发送用于指示该待监测业务流使用的传输层协议的指示信息。
第十方面,提供了一种通信装置,该通信装置包括获取单元和收发单元,该获取单元用于获取待监测业务流的网络状态信息;该收发单元用于根据该待监测业务流的网络状态信息向终端设备发送该待监测业务流中的至少一个数据包,该至少一个数据包中携带CE标记的数据包的数量与该至少一个数据包的数量的比值用于确定该待监测业务流的网络状态。
一种可能的实现方式中,该获取单元是收发单元,该收发单元具体用于接收来自接入网设备的待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,该获取单元是处理单元,该处理单元具体用于根据待监测业务流的监测配置信息监测待监测业务流的网络状态,得到待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
结合第十方面,在第十方面的某些实现方式中,该收发单元还用于接收来自会话管理网元的网络状态信息开放规则,该网络状态信息开放规则用于确定开放该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式,该网络状态信息开放规则包括以下一项或多项:从该接入网设备接收该待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、或用于指示根据该待监测业务流的网络状态信息在该至少一个数据包中添加CE标记的指示信息。
第十一方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第一方面及第一方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法,或者以实现上述第五方面及第五方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。示例性地,该通信装置还包括存储器。示例性地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为用户面网元。当该通信装置为用户面网元时,该通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于用户面网元中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于用户面网元中的芯片时,该通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。
示例性地,该收发器可以为收发电路。示例性地,该输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。
第十二方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第二方面及第二方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。示例性地,该通信装置还包括存储器。示例性地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为策略控制功能网元。当该通信装置为策略控制功能
网元时,该通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于策略控制功能网元中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于策略控制功能网元中的芯片时,该通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。
示例性地,该收发器可以为收发电路。示例性地,该输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。
第十三方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第三方面及第三方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。示例性地,该通信装置还包括存储器。示例性地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为会话管理网元。当该通信装置为会话管理网元时,该通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于会话管理网元中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于会话管理网元中的芯片时,该通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。
示例性地,该收发器可以为收发电路。示例性地,该输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。
第十四方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括处理器。该处理器与存储器耦合,可用于执行存储器中的指令,以实现上述第四方面及第四方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。示例性地,该通信装置还包括存储器。示例性地,该通信装置还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口耦合。
在一种实现方式中,该通信装置为应用服务器。当该通信装置为应用服务器时,该通信接口可以是收发器,或,输入/输出接口。
在另一种实现方式中,该通信装置为配置于应用服务器中的芯片。当该通信装置为配置于应用服务器中的芯片时,该通信接口可以是输入/输出接口。
示例性地,该收发器可以为收发电路。示例性地,该输入/输出接口可以为输入/输出电路。
第十五方面,提供了一种处理器,包括:输入电路、输出电路和处理电路。所述处理电路用于通过所述输入电路接收信号,并通过所述输出电路发射信号,使得所述处理器执行第一方面至第五方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
在具体实现过程中,上述处理器可以为一个或多个芯片,输入电路可以为输入管脚,输出电路可以为输出管脚,处理电路可以为晶体管、门电路、触发器和各种逻辑电路等。输入电路所接收的输入的信号可以是由例如但不限于接收器接收并输入的,输出电路所输出的信号可以是例如但不限于输出给发射器并由发射器发射的,且输入电路和输出电路可以是同一电路,该电路在不同的时刻分别用作输入电路和输出电路。本申请实施例对处理器及各种电路的具体实现方式不做限定。
第十六方面,提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和存储器。该处理器用于读取存储器中存储的指令,并可通过接收器接收信号,通过发射器发射信号,以执行第一方面至第五方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
示例性地,所述处理器为一个或多个,所述存储器为一个或多个。
示例性地,所述存储器可以与所述处理器集成在一起,或者所述存储器与处理器分离
设置。
在具体实现过程中,存储器可以为非瞬时性(non-transitory)存储器,例如只读存储器(read only memory,ROM),其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上,也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上,本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。
应理解,相关的数据交互过程例如发送指示信息可以为从处理器输出指示信息的过程,接收上行数据包可以为处理器接收上行数据包的过程。具体地,处理器输出的数据可以输出给发射器,处理器接收的输入数据可以来自接收器。其中,发射器和接收器可以统称为收发器。
上述第十六方面中的处理装置可以是一个或多个芯片。该处理装置中的处理器可以通过硬件来实现也可以通过软件来实现。当通过硬件实现时,该处理器可以是逻辑电路、集成电路等;当通过软件来实现时,该处理器可以是一个通用处理器,通过读取存储器中存储的软件代码来实现,该存储器可以集成在处理器中,可以位于该处理器之外,独立存在。
第十七方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令),当所述计算机程序被运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第五方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法。
第十八方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序(也可以称为代码,或指令)当其在计算机上运行时,使得上述第一方面至第五方面中任一种可能实现方式中的方法被执行。
第十九方面,提供了一种通信***,包括前述的用户面网元和应用服务器。
可选地,该通信***还包括前述的策略控制网元和/或会话管理网元。
图1是适用于本申请实施例提供的方法的通信***的示意图;
图2是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的示意性流程图;
图3是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的示意性流程图;
图4是TCP确认(acknowledgement,ACK)的TCP头部示意图头部格式示意图;
图5是是数据包的IP头部格式示意图;
图6是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的示意性流程图;
图7是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的示意性流程图;
图8是RTCP反馈报告的格式示意图;
图9是本申请实施例提供的通信方法的示意性流程图;
图10申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图;
图11申请另一实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图;
图12申请实施例提供的芯片***的示意图。
下面将结合附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信***,例如:长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)***、频分双工(frequency division duplex,FDD)***、时分双工(time
division duplex,TDD)、通用移动通信***(universal mobile telecommunication system,UMTS)、全球互联微波接入(worldwide interoperability for microwave access,WiMAX)通信***、第五代(5th generation,5G)***或新无线(new radio,NR)、第六代***(6th generation,6G)或未来的通信***等。本申请所述的5G移动通信***包括非独立组网(non-standalone,NSA)的5G移动通信***或独立组网(standalone,SA)的5G移动通信***。通信***还可以是公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)、设备到设备(device to device,D2D)通信***、机器到机器(machine to machine,M2M)通信***、物联网(Internet of things,IoT)通信***、车联万物(vehicle to everything,V2X)通信***、无人机(uncrewed aerial vehicle,UAV)通信***或者其他通信***。
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图,对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述。其中,在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示前后关联的对象是一种“或”的关系,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;本申请中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B者三种情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。并且,在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b,或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。另外,为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案,在本申请实施例中,采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。同时,在本申请实施例中,“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请实施例中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念,便于理解。
此外,本申请实施例描述的网络架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定,本领域普通技术人员可知,随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。
为便于理解本申请实施例,首先结合图1详细说明本申请实施例的一个应用场景。
1、用户设备(user equipment,UE):可以称为终端设备、终端、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、用户终端、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。终端设备还可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理器(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备、车载设备、无人机、可穿戴设备、5G网络中的终端设备或演进的PLMN中的终端设备等,本申请实施例对此并不限定。
2、接入网(access network,AN):为特定区域的授权用户提供入网功能,并能够根据用户的级别,业务的需求等使用不同质量的传输隧道。接入网可以为采用不同接入技术的接入网络。目前的接入网络技术包括:第三代(3rd generation,3G)***中采用的无线
接入网技术、***(4th generation,4G)***中采用的无线接入网技术、或下一代无线接入网(next generation radio access network,NG-RAN)技术(如5G***中采用的无线接入技术等)。
基于无线通信技术实现接入网络功能的接入网可以称为无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)。无线接入网能够管理无线资源,为终端提供接入服务,进而完成控制信号和用户数据在终端和核心网之间的转发。
无线接入网设备例如可以是基站(NodeB)、演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNB或eNodeB)、5G移动通信***中的下一代基站节点(next generation Node base station,gNB)、未来移动通信***中的基站或wifi无线热点***中的接入点(access point,AP)等,还可以是云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)场景下的无线控制器,或者该无线接入网设备可以为中继站、接入点、车载设备、无人机、可穿戴设备以及5G网络中的网络设备或者演进PLMN中的网络设备等。本申请实施例对无线接入网设备所采用的具体技术和具体设备形态不做限定。
3、接入管理网元:主要用于移动性管理和接入管理、负责在用户设备与策略控制功能(policy control function,PCF)网元间传递用户策略等,可以用于实现移动性管理实体(mobile management entity,MME)功能中除会话管理之外的其他功能。例如,接入授权(鉴权)的功能。
在5G通信***中,接入管理网元可以是接入和移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)网元。在未来通信***中,接入管理网元仍可以是AMF网元,或者,还可以有其他的名称,本申请不做限定。
4、会话管理网元:主要用于会话管理、用户设备的网络互连协议(Internet protocol,IP)地址的分配和管理、选择可管理用户平面功能、策略控制和收费功能接口的终结点以及下行数据通信等。
在5G通信***中,会话管理网元可以是会话管理功能(session management function,SMF)网元。在未来通信***中,会话管理网元仍可以是SMF网元,或者,还可以有其他的名称,本申请不做限定。
5、用户面网元:用于分组路由和转发、用户面数据的服务质量(quality of services,QoS)处理、完成用户面数据转发、基于会话/流级的计费统计,带宽限制功能等。
在5G通信***中,用户面网元可以是用户面功能(user plane function,UPF)网元。在未来通信***中,用户面网元仍可以是UPF网元,或者,还可以有其他名称,本申请不做限定。
6、数据网络网元:用于提供传输数据的网络。
在5G通信***中,数据网络网元可以是数据网络(data network,DN)网元。在未来通信***中,数据网络网元仍可以是DN网元,或者,还可以有其他名称,本申请不做限定。
7、策略控制网元:用于指导网络行为的统一策略框架,为控制面功能网元(例如AMF,SMF网元等)提供策略规则信息等。
在4G通信***中,该策略控制网元可以是策略和计费规则功能(policy and charging rules function,PCRF)网元。在5G通信***中,该策略控制网元可以是策略控制功能(policy
control function,PCF)网元。在未来的通信***中,该策略控制网元仍可以是PCF网元,或者,还可以有其他名称,本申请不做限定。
8、数据管理网元:用于处理用户设备标识、接入鉴权、注册以及移动性管理等。
在5G通信***中,该数据管理网元可以是统一数据管理(unified data management,UDM)网元;在4G通信***中,该数据管理网元可以是归属用户服务器(home subscriber serve,HSS)网元。在未来通信***中,数据管理网元仍可以是UDM网元,或者,还可以有其他的名称,本申请不做限定。
9、网络开放功能网元(network exposure function,NEF)网元:用于安全地向外部开放由第三代合作伙伴项目(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)网络功能提供的业务和能力等。
10、应用功能(application function,AF)网元:向UE提供某种应用层服务,AF在向UE提供服务时,对QoS策略和计费(charging)策略有要求,且需要通知网络。同时,AF也需要获取核心网反馈应用相关的信息。AF可以具有技术规范(technological specification,TS)23.501R-15版本中定义的AF的所有功能,以及具有用于应用业务的相关功能。也就是说,在用户面架构中,应用服务器(application server,AS)与UE是通过UE-RAN-UPF-AF的路径进行用户面通信。AF还可以在控制面架构中,通过NEF与5G核心网(5G core network,5GC)中的其他网络功能(network function,NF)进行通信。比如通过NEF与PCF通信。如果AF由5GC的运营商布置,则AF还可在控制面架构中,不通过NEF与5GC中的其他NF进行直接通信,比如直接与PCF通信。
11、网络数据分析功能(network data analysis function,NWDAF)网元:可用于收集来自网元、AF以及运维管理***(operation administration and maintenance,OAM)侧的数据,并通过机器学习、人工智能等方案对数据进行分析,并反馈于网元、AF等进行网络或业务配置优化,从而提供更好的网络质量与业务体验。
12、网络存储功能(network repository function,NRF)网元:可用于提供网元发现功能,基于其他网元的请求,提供网元类型对应的网元信息。NRF网元还提供网元管理服务,如网元注册、更新、去注册以及网元状态订阅和推送等。
13、鉴权服务器功能(authentication server function,AUSF)网元:主要负责对用户进行鉴权,以确定是否允许用户或设备接入网络。
14、服务通信代理(service communication proxy,SCP)网元:可以用于NF直接的间接通信,NF的服务请求可以由SCP代理。
图1中N1、N2、N3、N4、N6、N9、Nnwdaf、Nnef、Nnrf、Npcf、Nudm、Naf、Nausf、Namf以及Nsmf为接口序列号。这些接口序列号的含义可参见3GPP技术标准(technical standards,TS)23.501定义的含义。
应理解,上述应用于本申请实施例的网络架构仅是举例说明,适用于本申请实施例的网络架构并不局限于此,任何能够实现上述各网元的功能的网络架构都适用于本申请实施例。
还应理解,图1所示的AMF、SMF、UPF、NEF、PCF、UDM、NWDAF、NRF、AUSF、SCP等可以理解为核心网中用于实现不同功能的网元,例如可以按需组合成网络切片。这些核心网网元可以是各自独立的设备,也可以是集成于同一设备中实现不同的功能,本申
请对于上述网元的具体形态不作限定。
还应理解,上述命名仅为便于区分不同的功能而定义,不应对本申请构成任何限定。本申请并不排除在5G网络以及未来其他的网络中采用其他命名的可能。例如,在6G网络中,上述各个网络中的部分或全部可以沿用5G中的术语,也可能采用其他名称等。图1中的各个网元之间的接口名称只是一个示例,具体实现中接口的名称可能为其他的名称,本申请对此不作具体限定。此外,上述各个网元之间所传输的消息(或信令)的名称也仅仅是一个示例,对消息本身的功能不构成任何限定。
如果第三方应用能实时地获取网络状态,那么第三方应用可以根据网络状态进行相应调整,从而保证用户的业务体验,以及最大化网络利用效率。因此如何将更多的网络状态信息,诸如可用带宽、拥塞状况等快速开放给第三方应用是一个关键问题。其中第三方应用指的是由终端设备的生产商或归属运营商之外的厂商提供的应用。
一种实现方式中,RAN可以监测网络的拥塞状况,并通过在下行数据包的IP层头部携带显示拥塞通知(explicitcongestionnotification,ECN)标记的方式将网络状态信息开放出去。具体地,RAN在下行数据包的IP层头部携带ECN标记(ECN mark,或ECN lable),并将下行数据包发送给UE,随后UE统计接收到的至少一个下行数据包中携带ECN标记的下行数据包的数目和/或携带ECN标记的下行数据包的负载比特数,并通过传输层反馈机制将统计结果发送给应用服务器侧,从而使得第三方应用可以获取网络状态。
然而在上述方式中,若UE不支持通过传输层反馈机制将统计结果发送给应用服务器侧,则第三方应用无法感知到网络状态。此外,由于RAN所处的位置相对于核心网网元更接近用户侧,具有被物理破坏的可能性,因此由RAN解析下行数据包的IP层并在下行数据包的IP层头部携带ECN标记存在一定的安全隐患。
有鉴于此,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法,以期优化通过传输层向应用服务器反馈网络状态信息的方式。
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中将来自终端设备或接入网设备,目的地址为应用服务器的业务流称为上行业务流,以及将来自应用服务器,目的地址为终端设备的业务流称为下行业务流。应用服务器为终端设备提供上行业务流和/或下行业务流对应的应用业务。
还需要说明的是,本申请实施例中的传输层用于端到端提供媒体或应用内容的传输,保障媒体内容的可靠传输,示例性的,传输层可以包括传输控制协议(transport control protocol,TCP)、用户数据报协议(user datagram protocol,UDP)、快速UDP互联网连接(quick UDP Internet connection,QUIC)协议、实时传输协议(real-time transport protocol,RTP)、实时传输控制协议(real-time transport control protocol,RTCP)等传输层协议。
图2示出了本申请实施例提供的通信方法200的示意性流程图。下面详细描述方法200包括的各个步骤。
S210,用户面网元获取待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
待监测业务流的网络状态信息包括以下一项或多项:待监测业务流中的数据包的传输时延、待监测业务流的发送队列长度、待监测业务流的拥塞信息、待监测业务流的丢包率、或待监测业务流的可用带宽。
待监测业务流的拥塞信息用于确定待监测业务流是否发生拥塞和/或待监测业务流的拥塞程度。待监测业务流的拥塞信息可以包括以下一项或多项:待监测业务流中的数据包
的传输时延、传输时延阈值、待监测业务流的发送队列长度、发送队列长度阈值、待监测业务流的丢包率、丢包率阈值、待监测业务流的可用带宽、或可用带宽阈值。
其中,待监测业务流中的数据包的传输时延与传输时延阈值的可以用于确定待监测业务流是否发生拥塞。例如,若待监测业务流中的数据包的传输时延大于或等于传输时延阈值,则待监测业务流发生拥塞;若待监测业务流中的数据包的传输时延小于发送时延阈值,则待监测业务流未发生拥塞。或者,待监测业务流中的数据包的传输时延与传输时延阈值还可以用于确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度。例如,若待监测业务流中的数据包的传输时延与传输时延阈值的比值是60%,则待监测业务流的拥塞程度是60%。
类似地,待监测业务流的发送队列长度与发送队列长度阈值可以用于确定待监测业务流是否发生拥塞,或者,用于确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度。待监测业务流的丢包率与丢包率阈值可以用于确定待监测业务流是否发生拥塞,或者,用于确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度。待监测业务流的可用带宽与可用带宽阈值的可以用于确定待监测业务流是否发生拥塞,或者,用于确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度。
本申请实施例对用户面网元获取待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式不做限定。
一种可能的实现方式中,用户面网元接收来自接入网设备的待监测业务流的网络状态信息。例如,用户面网元接收来自接入网设备的上行数据包,该上行数据包的用户面通用分组无线网(general packet radio system,GPRS)隧道协议(GPRS tunneling protocol user plane,GTP-U)层头部包括待监测业务流的网络状态信息。又例如,用户面网元通过会话管理网元接收来自接入网设备的待监测业务流的网络状态信息,即会话管理网元从接入网设备接收待监测业务流的网络状态信息,然后会话管理网元将待监测业务流的网络状态信息发送给用户面网元。
在该实现方式中,接入网设备发送的待监测业务流的网络状态信息包括的内容与接入网设备接收到的监测配置信息相关。监测配置信息用于监测待监测业务流的网络状态,监测配置信息包括监测参数以及待监测业务流的标识或GTP-U隧道标识。
监测参数可以包括以下一项或多项:传输时延、丢包率、拥塞程度、发送数据队列长度或可用带宽。例如,若监测参数包括传输时延,则接入网设备发送的待监测业务流的网络状态信息可以包括待监测业务流中的数据包的传输时延。又例如,若监测参数包括拥塞程度,则接入网设备发送的待监测业务流的网络状态信息包括待监测业务流的拥塞信息。
待监测业务流的标识用于标识待监测业务流。示例性的,待监测业务流的标识包括以下一项或多项:数据连接会话标识(比如:协议数据单元(protocol data unit,PDU)会话标识,或IP连接访问网络(IP-connectivity access network,IP-CAN)会话标识,或其他会话的标识,为便于描述,后续实施例以PDU会话为例进行说明)、业务流描述信息、应用标识、QoS流标识(QoS flow identifier,QFI)、业务类型标识或应用类型标识。
其中,PDU会话标识为承载待监测业务流的PDU会话的会话标识信息。例如,若PDU会话仅承载了待监测业务流,则待监测业务流的标识可以是PDU会话标识。
业务流描述信息用于确定待监测业务流。业务流描述信息可以是待监测业务流的IP五元组描述信息、IP三元组信息、域名、上下行等IP数据包过滤集中的至少一个。待监测业务流的IP五元组描述信息可以为:源IP地址(source IP address)、目的IP地址(destination IP address)、源端口号(source port number)、目的端口号(destination port
number)和协议类型。待监测业务流的IP三元组信息可以为:目的IP地址、目的端口号与协议类型。或者业务流描述信息可以为以太网(ethernet)包头信息中的至少一个,例如,源媒体访问控制(media access control,MAC)地址和目的MAC地址、虚拟局域网(virtual local area network,VLAN)标识等。业务流描述信息还可以包括应用标识(application identity)。示例性的,业务流描述信息可以称为业务数据流(service data flow,SDF)描述信息。SDF描述信息可以参考IP数据包过滤集,关于IP数据包过滤集的描述可以参考3GPP TS 23.501中的描述。
应用标识用于标识待监测业务流对应的应用。若应用仅有待监测业务流,则待监测业务流的标识可以是应用标识。
QFI用于标识QoS流,待监测业务流在该QoS流中传输。例如,若该QoS流仅对应待监测业务流,即仅待监测业务流在该QoS流中传输,则待监测业务流的标识可以是QFI。
业务类型标识可以为待监测业务流的类型的标识。例如,待监测业务流的类型可以是视频类业务、语音类业务、游戏类业务或网页浏览类业务等。
应用类型标识可以为待监测业务流对应的应用的类型的标识。
可选的,待监测业务流的监测配置信息还包括上报待监测业务流的网络状态信息的触发条件。例如,待监测业务流的监测配置信息包括传输时延门限,则当目标待监测业务流中的数据包的传输时延超过传输时延门限时,触发上报待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
可选的,待监测业务流的监测配置信息还包括上报待监测业务流的网络状态信息的上报周期。相应地,接入网设备根据该上报周期周期性地发送待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
可选的,待监测业务流的监测配置信息还包括上报目标网元标识和/或上报网络状态信息的方式。上报目标网元标识是接入网设备上报待监测业务流的网络状态信息的目标网元的标识。例如上报目标网元标识是用户面网元的标识或会话管理网元的标识。上报网络状态信息的方式包括用户面方式或控制面方式。用户面方式指的是接入网设备向用户面网元上报待监测业务流的网络状态信息。示例性地,用户面方式还包括通过上行数据包的GTP-U层上报网络状态信息,即接入网设备将待监测业务流的网络状态信息携带在上行数据包的GTP-U层头部发送给用户面网元。控制面方式指的是接入网设备向控制面网元(例如会话管理网元)上报待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,用户面网元通过监测待监测业务流的网络状态得到待监测业务流的网络状态信息。其中,用户面网元根据接收到的监测配置信息监测待监测业务流的网络状态。例如,若监测参数包括传输时延,则用户面网元监测待监测业务流中的数据包在接入网设备与用户面网元之间的传输时延,得到待监测业务流中的数据包的传输时延。又例如,若监测参数包括丢包率,则用户面网元监测待监测业务流中的数据包的丢包情况得到待监测业务流的丢包率。
S220,用户面网元接收来自终端设备的第一传输层反馈消息。相应地,在S220中,终端设备向用户面网元发送第一传输层反馈消息。
第一传输层反馈消息与待监测业务流中的至少一个数据包对应,即第一传输层反馈消息是针对待监测业务中的至少一个数据包的反馈消息。第一传输层反馈消息可以是用户面网元获取到待监测业务流的网络状态信息的时刻接收到的,也可以是用户面网元获取到待监测业务流的网络状态信息之后接收到的。
本申请实施例对终端设备向用户面网元发送第一传输层反馈消息的方式不做限定。例如,若待监测业务流中既有上行数据流,又有下行数据流,则终端设备可以通过待监测业务流中的上行数据流向用户面网元发送第一传输层反馈消息,即第一传输层反馈消息属于待监测业务流。又例如,若待监测业务流中只有下行数据流,则终端设备可以通过上行业务流向用户面网元发送第一传输层反馈消息,即第一传输层反馈消信息与待监测业务流对应,该上行业务流与待监测业务流对应相同的业务。
本申请实施例对第一传输层反馈消息的形式不做限定。
示例性的,待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是TCP,则第一传输层反馈消息可以是TCP确认(acknowledgement,ACK)。关于TCP ACK的更多描述可以参考下文方法300。
又示例性的,待监测业务流使用的是QUIC协议,则第一传输层反馈消息可以是QUIC ACK。关于QUC ACK的更多描述可以参考下文方法600。
再示例性的,待监测业务流使用的是RTP或RTCP,则第一传输层反馈消息是RTCP反馈报告。关于RTCP报告的更多描述可以参考下文方法700。
S230,用户面网元向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息。
一种实现方式中,用户面网元根据第一传输层反馈消息向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息,包括:用户面网元根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示网络状态的信息;用户面网元通过在第一传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,生成第二传输层反馈消息;用户面网元向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息。
一种可能的实现方式中,用户面网元根据第一传输层反馈消息向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息,包括:用户面网元根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示网络状态的信息;用户面网元通过修改第一传输层反馈消息中的部分字段,生成第二传输层反馈消息;用户面网元向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息。
更多关于用户面网元向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息的描述可以参考下文方法300、方法600和方法700中的描述。
用于指示网络状态的信息所指示的网络状态与待监测业务流的网络状态信息所指示的网络状态相同,或者用于指示网络状态的信息与待监测业务流的网络状态信息可以是相同的。例如,待监测业务流的网络状态信息包括可用带宽阈值和待监测业务流的可用带宽,若待监测业务流的可用带宽与可用带宽阈值的比值是60%,则说明待监测业务流的拥塞程度是60%。进而,用户面网元向应用服务器发送的第二传输层反馈消息包括的用于指示网络状态的信息,指示待监测业务流的拥塞程度是60%。
一种可能的实现方式中,用户面网元根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示网络状态的信息,包括:用户面网元根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息以及根据至少一个数据包的ECN标记生成用于指示网络状态的信息。
用户面网元生成用于指示网络状态的信息的方式可以参考下文方法300的S314、方法600的S616和方法700的S715中的描述。
本申请实施例对用户面网元获取至少一个数据包的ECN标记的方式不做限定。
示例性的,用户面网元获取至少一个数据包的ECN标记,包括:用户面网元接收来自应用服务器的至少一个数据包;用户面网元确定至少一个数据包的ECN标记。即用户面网元通过解析至少一个数据包的IP层,确定至少一个数据包的ECN标记。进而,用户
面网元可以保存至少一个数据包的ECN标记。
又示例性的,用户面网元获取至少一个数据包的ECN标记,包括:用户面网元从第一传输层反馈消息中获取至少一个数据包的ECN标记。用户面网元从第一传输层反馈消息中获取至少一个数据包的ECN标记的更多描述,可以参考下文方法300、方法600和方法700中的描述。
本申请实施例对用户面网元生成用于指示网络状态的信息的触发条件不做限定。
一种可能的实现方式中,用户面网元生成用于指示网络状态的信息的触发条件包括:待监测业务流的网络状态信息和第一传输层反馈消息,即用户面网元获取到待监测业务流的网络状态信息和第一传输层反馈消息的情况下,生成用于指示网络状态的信息。
另一种可能的实现方式中,用户面网元生成用于指示网络状态的信息的触发条件包括:用户面网元确定应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,即用户面网元确定应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的情况下,生成用于指示网络状态的信息。用户面网元确定应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的方式可以参考下文方法300、方法600和方法700中的描述。
再一种可能的实现方式中,用户面网元生成用于指示网络状态的信息的触发条件包括:用户面网元接收到网络状态信息开放规则,即用户面网元接收到网络状态信息开放规则的情况下,根据网络状态信息开放规则生成用于指示网络状态的信息。
网络状态信息开放规则用于确定通过传输层开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式。示例性地,网络状态信息开放规则包括以下一项或多项:用于指示介入终端设备与应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息、用于指示对外开放规则的指示信息、从接入网设备接收待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、检测来自终端设备的第一传输层反馈消息的方式、在第一传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息的方式、或用于指示根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息在至少一个数据包中添加拥塞经历(congestion experienced,CE)标记的指示信息。
其中,传输层能力协商流程包括:确定是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的流程。用于指示介入终端设备与应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息指示是否介入到终端设备与应用服务器的传输层能力协商中,或指示用户面网元监测该终端设备或应用服务器是否支持通过传输层反馈待监测业务流的网络状态信息,可选地,若该终端设备不支持或者应用服务器支持通过传输层反馈待监测业务流的网络状态信息,那么用户面网元代替终端设备与应用服务器进行能力协商。用于指示对外开放规则的指示信息指示该待监测业务流的网络状态信息将会通过传输层对外开放。所述支持通过传输层开放/反馈网络状态信息是指终端设备和/或应用服务器支持通过精准TCP、QUIC或RTP/RTCP等协议进行网络拥塞状况反馈。从接入网设备接收待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式,是指获取来自接入网设备上报的待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式,如从来自接入网设备的上行数据包GTP-U头部中获取待监测业务流的网络状态信息,或从会话管理网元获取待监测业务流的网络状态信息,会话管理网元从接入网设备接收待监测业务流的网络状态信息。检测来自终端设备的第一传输层反馈消息的方式,用于指示用户面网元如何确定该数据为终端设备的第一传输层反馈消息,例如,针对TCP协议,用户面网元识别数据的TCP头部的ACK位从而确定该数据为相应的TCP反馈消息。在第一传输层反馈消息中添加用
于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息的方式,用于指示用户面网元针对不同传输协议获取所述至少一个数据包中的ECN标记并相应生成第二传输层消息。网络状态信息开放规则的更多描述可以参考下文方法300、方法600和方法700中的描述。
可选的,用户面网元根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示网络状态的信息之前,方法200还包括:用户面网元辅助终端设备与应用服务器进行传输层能力协商流程,即用户面网元介入终端设备与应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程。
用户面网元辅助终端设备与应用服务器进行传输层能力协商,包括:用户面网元接收来自终端设备的第一传输层数据包,第一传输层数据包与待监测业务流对应;用户面网元根据第一传输层数据包向应用服务器发送第二传输层数据包,第二传输层数据包包括用于指示支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的指示信息。示例性的,第一传输层数据包与待监测业务流对应包括如下几种情况:第一传输层数据包用于建立待监测业务流,或者,第一传输层数据包是针对待监测业务流中的至少一个数据包的反馈消息,或者第一传输层数据包用于协商待监测业务流承载的业务的业务参数。
可选的,用户面网元根据第一传输层数据包向应用服务器发送第二传输层数据包之前,方法200还包括:用户面网元确定第一传输层数据包包括用于指示不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的指示信息。
示例性的,若待监测业务流使用传输层协议是TCP,则第一传输层数据包和第二传输层数据包是TCP连接建立消息。再示例性的,若待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是RTP或RTCP,则第一传输层数据包和第二传输层数据包是上行会话描述协议。更多关于第一传输层数据包和第二传输层数据包的描述可以参考下文方法300、方法600和方法700中的描述。
在本申请实施例中,若用户面网元获取到待监测业务流的网络状态信息,则根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,进一步地,用户面网元从终端设备接收到第一传输层反馈消息之后,根据第一传输层反馈消息向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息,第二传输层反馈消息包括用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,从而应用服务器可以根据第二传输层反馈消息确定待监测业务流的网络状态。从而使得应用服务器可以根据待监测业务流的网络状态调整待监测业务流的业务参数,如动态调整媒体的码率,以保证用户的业务体验,提升网络资源的有效利用率。
此外,根据本申请实施例提供的方法,接入网设备可以将待监测业务流的网络状态信息发送给用户面网元,再由用户面网元通过传输层开放给应用服务器。相比于接入网设备通过在下行数据包的IP层头部携带ECN标记以开放网络状态信息的方式,由于不需要接入网设备解析下行数据包的IP层头部,因此安全性更高,而且网络状态信息不需要发送到终端设备,再由终端设备发送至应用服务器侧,可以实现更加快速地网络状态信息反馈。
此外,由于用户面网元向应用服务器发送的第二传输层反馈消息包括用于指示网络状态的信息,从而使得在不考虑终端设备能力的情况下,根据本申请实施例提供的方法也可以实现通过传输层向应用服务器开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息。避免终端设备不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力时,无法向应用服务器开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息,从而无法由应用进行动态调整从而影响用户体验的问题。
图3示出了本申请实施例提供的通信方法的示意性流程图。具体的,图3中以待监测
业务流使用的传输层协议是TCP为例,说明如何根据本申请实施例提供的方法实现通过传输层开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
如方法200中的S230所述,用户面网元(下文中记为UPF)根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示网络状态的信息的触发条件包括三种,在UPF基于不同的触发条件生成用于指示网络状态的信息的情况下,方法300包括的步骤也不同。
一种可能的实现方式中,若UPF在获取到待监测业务流的网络状态信息和第一传输层反馈消息的情况下生成用于指示网络状态的信息,则方法300可以包括S301至S304、S309和S310、S312至S315。
另一种可能的实现方式中,若UPF在接收到网络状态信息开放规则的情况下生成用于指示网络状态的信息,则方法300可以包括S301至S305、S309和S310、S312至S315。
再一种可能的实现方式中,若UPF在确定应用服务器(下文中记为AS)支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的情况下生成用于指示网络状态的信息,则方法300可以包括S301至S304、S308至S310、S312至S315。
可选的,方法300还包括S306和S307。可选的,方法300还包括S311。
下面详细描述方法300包括的各个步骤。
S301,应用功能网元(下文中记为AF)向策略控制功能网元(下文中记为PCF)发送指示信息#1。相应的,PCF接收来自AF的指示信息#1。
指示信息#1是用于指示通过传输层开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息的指示信息。示例性的,指示信息#1可以命名为低时延、低损耗、可扩展吞吐量(lowlatenty,low loss,scalable throughput,L4S)指示信息。
指示信息#1的形式可以是以下示例中的一个或多个。
示例性的,指示信息#1是业务流描述信息,业务流描述信息可以参考上文S210中的描述。
又示例性的,指示信息#1是1比特的信息。
再示例性的,指示信息#1是事件标识。事件标识与“通过传输层开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息”这一事件对应。
本申请实施例对AF向PCF发送指示信息#1的方式不做限定。例如,AF可以通过应用功能请求(AF request)消息向PCF发送指示信息#1。即AF向PCF发送AF请求消息,AF请求消息包括指示信息#1,示例性地,该AF请求消息可以是Npcf_策略鉴权(Npcf_PolicyAuthorization)服务。
示例性的,AF直接向PCF发送指示信息#1,或者,AF先向网络开放功能网元(network exposure function,NEF)发送指示信息#1,NEF再将指示信息#1转发给PCF。示例性地,AF可以通过Nnef_AFQoS会话(Nnef_AFSessionWithQoS)服务向NEF发送指示信息#1,随后NEF通过调用Npcf_PolicyAuthorization服务向PCF发送指示信息#1。
可选的,若AF没有向PCF发送业务流描述信息,且指示信息#1不是业务流描述信息,则在S301中,AF向PCF发送业务流描述信息和指示信息#1。例如,AF向PCF发送AF请求消息,AF请求消息包括业务流描述信息和指示信息#1。
可选的,在S301中,AF还向PCF发送指示信息#2,指示信息#2是用于指示介入终端设备(下文中记为UE)与AS的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息。指示信息#2的更多
描述可以参考方法200中的S230。UE与AS的传输层能力协商流程指的是:UE确定AS是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,以及AS确定UE是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的流程。示例性的,在待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是TCP的情况下,通过传输层开放网络状态信息的方式包括L4S方式,因此指示信息#2可以用于指示介入UE与AS的L4S能力协商流程。
可选的,在S301中,AF还向PCF发送指示信息#3,指示信息#3是用于指示对外开放规则的指示信息。具体的,指示信息#3用于指示核心网通过传输层对外开放网络状态信息的规则。例如,在待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是TCP的情况下,指示信息#3指示的对外开放规则包括:核心网使用TCP进行L4S反馈。或者,指示信息#3用于指示待监测业务流使用的传输层协议。
S302,PCF生成策略控制与计费(policy control and charging,PCC)规则。
PCC规则包括待监测业务流的监测策略,待监测业务流的监测策略用于确定待监测业务流的监测配置信息,监测配置信息可以参考上文S210中的描述。监测策略包括监测参数和待监测业务流的标识。可选的,监测策略还包括上报待监测业务流的网络状态信息的触发条件。可选的,监测策略还包括待监测业务流的网络状态信息的上报周期。可选的,监测策略还包括上报目标网元标识和/或上报网络状态信息的方式。监测策略的更多描述可以参考上文S210中关于监测配置信息的描述。
可选的,PCC规则还包括网络状态信息开放策略,网络状态信息开放策略包括以下一项或多项:指示信息#2、指示信息#3、接收来自RAN的待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、检测来自UE的第一传输层反馈消息的方式、或在第一传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示网络状态的信息的方式。
其中,接收来自RAN的待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式包括:通过上行数据包GTP-U层头部接收来自RAN侧的待监测业务流的网络状态信息、或通过会话管理网元(下文中记为SMF)接收来自RAN侧的待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
在待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是TCP的情况下,第一传输层反馈消息是TCP ACK,图4示出了TCP ACK的TCP头部示意图。如图4中的(a)所示,TCP ACK的TCP头部包括如下字段:源端口、目的端口、序列号(sequence number)、确认号(acknowledgement number)、头部长度(header length)、预留(reserved)字段、精准ECN(accurate ECN,ACE)字段、紧急(urgent,URG)标志、ACK标志、推送(push,PSH)标志、复位(reset,RST)标志、同步(synchronize,SYN)标志、结束(finish,FIN)标志、窗口尺寸(window size)、校验和(checksum)、紧急指针(urgent pointer)、可选项(options)。ACE字段是由精准ECN(accurate ECN,AE)、拥塞窗口降低位(congestion window reduced,CWR)和ECN回应位(ECN echo,ECE)三个比特位合成的。其中,TCP连接建立请求的TCP头部中的SYN标志和ACK标志置为“1”。
根据图4中的(a)所示的TCP ACK的TCP头部示意图,检测来自UE的第一传输层反馈消息的方式包括:若来自UE的报文的TCP头部中的ACK标志置为“1”,则该报文是TCPACK,即该报文是第一传输层反馈消息。
进而,在第一传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示网络状态的信息的方式包括:修改TCP ACK中的部分字段的取值,或者对TCP ACK中的部分字段赋值,使得TCP ACK中的
部分字段用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态。TCP ACK中的部分字段包括以下一项或多项:TCP ACK的TCP头部中的ACE字段中的参数r.cep、TCP ACK的TCP头部中的可选项字段中的参数r.ceb、参数r.e0b、或参数r.e1b。其中,r.cep表示携带CE标记的数据包的数目,r.ceb表示携带显示拥塞通知能力传输(ECN capable transport,ECT)0标记的数据包的负载比特数,r.e0b表示携带ECT1标记的数据包的负载比特数、r.e1b表示携带CE标记的数据包的负载比特数。
需要说明的是,在S302中,PCF根据来自AF的指示信息(即指示信息#1、指示信息#2和指示信息#3中的一个或多个)生成PCC规则,即PCF根据来自AF的指示信息生成监测策略,或者,生成监测策略和网络状态信息开放策略。
例如,PCF根据指示信息#1生成的监测策略包括上报目标网元标识和/或上报网络状态信息的方式。其中,上报目标网元标识是UPF的标识。
例如,PCF根据指示信息#1生成的网络状态信息开放策略包括:接收来自RAN的待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式。
又例如,PCF根据指示信息#1和指示信息#2生成的网络状态信息开放策略包括:接收来自RAN的待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式和指示信息#2。
又例如,PCF根据指示信息#1、指示信息#2和指示信息#3生成的网络状态信息开放策略包括:接收来自RAN的待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、指示信息#2、指示信息#3、检测来自UE的第一传输层反馈消息的方式和在第一传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示网络状态的信息的方式。
S303,PCF向SMF发送PCC规则。相应地,SMF接收来自PCF的PCC规则。
如上所述,PCC规则包括监测策略,或者包括监测策略和网络状态信息开放策略,因此可以说,PCF向SMF发送监测策略,或者,发送监测策略和网络状态信息开放策略。
示例性的,PCF通过会话管理(session management,SM)策略关联建立(SM policy association establishment)流程向SMF发送PCC规则。例如,PCF通过PCF服务化接口_SM策略控制_建立响应(Npcf_SMPolicyControl_Create Response)服务操作向SMF发送PCC规则。
又示例性的,PCF通过会话管理策略关联修改(SM policy association modification)流程向SMF发送PCC规则。例如,PCF通过PCF服务化接口_SM策略控制_更新通知请求(Npcf_SMPolicyControl_UpdateNotify Request)服务操作向SMF发送PCC规则。
可选的,在S303中,PCF还向SMF发送指示信息#4,指示信息#4用于指示对待监测业务流进行网络状态监测并开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
可选的,若PCF接收到来自AF的指示信息#2和/或指示信息#3,但PCF生成的网络状态信息开放策略不包括指示信息#2和/或指示信息#3,则在S303中,PCF还向SMF发送指示信息#2和/或指示信息#3。
S304,SMF向RAN发送监测配置信息。相应的,RAN接收来自SMF的监测配置信息。
SMF根据来自PCF的监测策略向RAN发送监测配置信息,即SMF根据监测策略确定监测配置信息,并向RAN发送监测配置信息。
示例性的,SMF向RAN发送监测配置信息,包括:SMF向RAN发送N2SM消息(N2
SM message),N2SM消息包括监测配置信息。比如,SMF向AMF发送N2SM相关的容器,N2SM相关的容器包括N2SM消息,AMF再将N2SM消息发往RAN侧。
可选的,若SMF从PCF接收到网络状态信息开放策略,则方法300还包括S305。
S305,SMF向UPF发送网络状态信息开放规则。相应的,UPF接收来自SMF的网络状态信息开放规则。
SMF根据来自PCF的网络状态信息开放策略向UPF发送网络状态信息开放规则,即SMF根据网络状态信息开放策略确定网络状态信息开放规则,并向UPF发送网络状态信息开放规则。示例性的,网络状态信息规则包含于待监测业务流对应的包检测规则(packet detection rule,PDR)中。
示例性的,SMF向UPF发送网络状态信息开放规则,包括:SMF向UPF发送N4会话建立请求(N4session establishment request)消息,N4会话建立请求消息包括网络状态信息开放规则。或者,SMF向UPF发送网络状态信息开放规则,包括:SMF向UPF发送N4会话修改请求(N4session modification request)消息,N4会话修改请求消息包括网络状态信息开放规则。
可选的,若SMF接收到来自PCF的指示信息#2和/或指示信息#3,但SMF向UPF发送的网络状态信息开放规则不包括指示信息#2和/或指示信息#3,则在S305中,SMF还向UPF发送指示信息#2和/或指示信息#3。
可选的,若UPF接收到来自SMF的指示信息#2,则方法300还包括S306和S307。当然,即使UPF没有接收到来自SMF的指示信息#2,方法300也可以执行S306和S307。
可选的,在S305中,UPF还接收来自SMF的监测配置信息,即SMF根据监测策略生成相应的监测配置信息并发往UPF侧,该UPF侧的监测配置信息包含获取待监测业务的网络状态信息的方法,比如,获取待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方法为通过用户面上行数据包的GTP-U层头部获取待监测业务的网络状态信息。
可选的,网络状态信息开放规则包含在监测配置信息中。
S306,UPF接收来自UE的TCP连接建立消息#1。
TCP连接建立消息#1(第一传输层数据包的示例)用于建立UE与AS之间的TCP连接,该TCP连接用于传输待监测业务流。
根据图4中的(b)所示,TCP连接建立消息#1的TCP头部包括以下字段:头部长度、预留字段、AE、CWR、ECE、URG标志、ACK标志、PSH标志、RST标志、SYN标志和FIN标志。其中,SYN标志置为“1”。根据图4中的(b)所示的TCP连接建立消息的TCP头部示意图,UPF接收的来自UE的报文的TCP头部中的SYN标志置为“1”,则该报文是TCP连接建立消息#1。
S307,UPF向AS发送TCP连接建立消息#2。相应的,AS接收来自UPF的TCP连接建立消息#2。
具体的,UPF根据TCP连接建立消息#1向AS发送TCP连接建立消息#2(第二传输层数据包的示例)。TCP连接建立消息#2包括用于指示支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的指示信息。相应的,AS根据TCP连接建立消息#2包括的用于指示支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的指示信息,确定UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。应理解,AS确定UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,并不代表UE实际上支持通过传输
层开放网络状态信息的能力,而是AS认为UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
根据图4中的(b)所示的TCP连接建立消息的TCP头部示意图,当AE、CWR和ECE三个比特的取值为“11 1”、“0 1 0”、“0 1 1”、“1 1 0”或“1 0 0”时,AE、CWR和ECE三个比特用于指示支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息。即UPF根据TCP连接建立消息#1向AS发送TCP连接建立消息#2时,将TCP连接建立消息#1的TCP头部中AE、CWR和ECE三个比特位置为“11 1”、“0 1 0”、“0 1 1”、“1 1 0”或“1 0 0”,生成TCP连接建立消息#2,并将TCP连接建立消息#2发送给AS。例如,若TCP连接建立是由UE发起的,则UPF将TCP连接建立消息#1的TCP头部中AE、CWR和ECE三个比特位置为“11 1”,生成TCP连接建立消息#2。若TCP连接建立是由AS发起的,则UPF将TCP连接建立消息#1的TCP头部中AE、CWR和ECE三个比特位置为“0 1 0”、“0 1 1”、“1 1 0”或“1 0 0”,生成TCP连接建立消息#2。若AE、CWR和ECE三个比特位置为“0 1 0”,则表示不支持在TCP初始建立消息或TCP初始建立确认消息的IP头部添加ECN标记。若AE、CWR和ECE三个比特位置为“0 1 1”,则表示UPF支持将TCP初始建立消息或TCP初始建立确认消息的IP头部的ECN字段置为“01”。若AE、CWR和ECE三个比特位置为“1 1 0”,则表示UPF支持将TCP初始建立消息或TCP初始建立确认消息的IP头部的ECN字段置为“11”。若AE、CWR和ECE三个比特位置为“1 0 0”,则表示UPF支持将TCP初始建立消息或TCP初始建立确认消息的IP头部的ECN字段置为“10”。
可选的,在UPF向AF发送TCP连接建立消息#2之前,UPF根据TCP连接建立消息#1确定UE是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。即UPF确定TCP连接建立消息#1的TCP头部中的AE、CWR和ECE三个比特的取值是否为“11 1”、“0 1 0”、“0 1 1”、“1 1 0”或“1 0 0”。若UPF根据TCP连接建立消息#1确定UE不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则UPF根据将TCP连接建立消息#1的TCP头部中AE、CWR和ECE三个比特的置为“11 1”、“0 1 0”、“0 1 1”、“1 1 0”或“1 0 0”,生成TCP连接建立消息#2。若UPF根据TCP连接建立消息#1确定UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则UPF直接将TCP连接建立消息#1转发给AS,即TCP连接建立消息#2是TCP连接建立消息#1。
S308,AS向UPF发送TCP连接建立消息#3。
根据图4中的(b)所示的TCP连接建立消息的TCP头部示意图,UPF接收的来自AS的报文的TCP头部中的SYN标志置为“1”,则该报文是TCP连接建立消息#3。TCP连接建立消息#3用于建立UE与AS之间的TCP连接,该TCP连接用于传输待监测业务流。若TCP连接建立是由UE发起的,则TCP连接建立消息#3是TCP连接建立消息#2的响应消息。
相应的,UPF接收到TCP连接建立消息#3之后,根据TCP连接建立消息#3确定AS是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。若TCP连接建立消息#3中AE、CWR和ECE三个比特的取值为“11 1”、“0 1 0”、“0 1 1”、“1 1 0”或“1 0 0”,则UPF确定AS支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,反之UPF确定AS不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
可以理解,UPF接收到TCP连接建立消息#3之后,方法300还包括:UPF将TCP连接建立消息#3转发给UE。
S309,RAN向UPF发送网络状态信息。相应的,UPF接收来自RAN的网络状态信息。
RAN根据监测配置信息向UPF发送待监测业务流的网络状态信息。其中,监测配置信息可能包含待监测业务流的标识,如QoS流标识或PDU会话标识等。
示例性的,若RAN接收到的监测配置信息包括上报网络状态信息的方式,且该方式包括通过上行数据包的GTP-U层头部上报网络状态信息,则RAN向UPF发送网络状态信息,包括:RAN向UPF发送上行数据包,该上行数据包的GTP-U层包括待监测业务流的网络状态信息。该上行数据包是RAN接收的来自UE的数据包,或者是RAN生成的数据包。
又示例性的,若上报网络状态信息的方式包括控制面方式,则RAN向UPF发送网络状态信息,包括:RAN通过SMF向UPF发送待监测业务流的网络状态信息,即RAN通过AMF向SMF发送待监测业务流的网络状态信息,SMF再将待监测业务流的网络状态信息转发给UPF。
S310,UPF接收来自AS的至少一个数据包。相应的,AS向UPF发送至少一个数据包。
需要说明的是,该至少一个数据包是待监测业务流中的数据包。该至少一个数据包可以是UPF在接收网络状态信息之前接收到的,或者可以是在接收网络状态信息的时刻接收到的,或者可以是在接收网络状态信息之后接收到的。
S311,UPF确定至少一个数据包的ECN标记。
具体的,UPF通过解析至少一个数据包中每个数据包的IP层头部确定至少一个数据包的ECN标记。
图5示出了数据包的IP版本4(IP version 4,IPv4)头部的示意图。如图5所示,数据包的IPv4头部包括如下内容:版本(version)、网际头部长度(Internet header length,IHL)、差分服务代码点(differentiated service code point,DSCP)、ECN、数据包总长度(total length)、数据包标识(identification)、标志(flags)、片位移(fragment offset)、生存时间(time to live)、协议(protocol)、头部校验和(header checksum)、源IP地址、目的IP地址和可选(options)字段(如果IHL>5)。其中,若ECN字段的取值为“00”,则该数据包是未携带ECN标记的数据包;若ECN字段的取值为“01”,则该数据包是标记ECT1标记的数据包;若ECN字段的取值为“10”,则该数据包是携带ECT0标记的数据包;若ECN字段的取值为“11”,则该数据包是携带CE标记的数据包。
假设至少一个数据包包括20个数据包,每个数据包的负载比特数为4,UPF通过解析每个数据包的IP层,确定该20个数据包的ECN标记为:携带CE标记的数据包数目为0、携带CE标记的数据包的负载比特数为0、携带ECT1标记的数据包的负载比特数为40、携带ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数为40。
需要说明的是,若UPF在接收至少一个数据包之前,或者在接收至少一个数据包的时刻,接收到来自RAN的待监测业务流的网络状态信息,则UPF可以确定至少一个数据包的ECN标记,以便于UPF接收到来自UE的TCP ACK#1之后,根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息和至少一个数据包的ECN标记向AS发送TCP ACK#2。
还需要说明的是,若AS根据接收到的TCP连接建立消息#2确定UE支持通过传输层
反馈网络状态信息的能力,则AS在至少一个数据包中添加ECN标记,以指示AS支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力,或者指示网络拥塞。例如,若至少一个数据包中携带的ECN标记是ECT0标记或ECT1标记,则至少一个数据包可以指示AS支持支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力。若至少一个数据包中包括携带CE标记的数据包,则该至少一个数据包指示网络拥塞。
S312,UPF向UE发送至少一个数据包。相应的,UE接收至少一个数据包。
S313,UE向UPF发送TCP ACK#1。相应的,UPF接收来自UE的TCP ACK#1。
UE接收到至少一个数据包之后,则向UPF发送TCP ACK#1(第一传输层反馈消息的示例)。相应的,UPF向UE发送至少一个数据包之后,若接收到来自UE的报文的TCP头部中ACK标志置为“1”,则UPF确定该报文是TCP ACK#1。
可选的,若UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则UE可以确定至少一个数据包的ECN标记,并通过TCP ACK#1反馈至少一个数据包的ECN标记。如S302所述,UE可以对TCP ACK#1的TCP头部中的ACE字段中的r.cep、可选项字段中的r.ceb、r.e0b、r.e1b赋值,使得TCP ACK#1可以指示至少一个数据包的ECN标记。例如,根据至少一个数据包的ECN标记,UE为r.cep赋值0,为r.ceb赋值0,为r.e0b赋值40,以及为r.e1b赋值40。
需要说明的是,TCP ACK#1是UPF接收到待监测业务流的网络状态信息的时刻接收到的,或者,TCP ACK#1是UPF接收到待监测业务流的网络信息之后收到的。
S314,UPF根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示网络状态的信息。
用于指示网络状态的信息包括以下至少一项:携带CE标记的数据包的数目、携带CE标记的数据包的负载比特数、携带ECT1标记的数据包的负载比特数、或携带ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数。
具体的,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息满足如下条件:根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定的携带CE标记的数据包的数目与至少一个数据包的数目的比值,用于表征待监测业务流的网络状态。待监测业务流的网络状态是根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息确定的。
例如,若根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度是60%,则UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息满足如下条件:根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定的携带CE标记的数据包的数目与至少一个数据包的数目的比值是60%。
例如,在至少一个数据包包括20个数据包、每个数据包的负载比特数为4的情况下,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包的数目为12,和/或,携带CE标记的数据包的负载比特数为48。或者,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带ECT1标记的数据包的负载比特数为32,在默认剩余数据包是携带CE标记的数据包的情况下,相当于可以根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定携带CE标记的数据包的数目是12。或者,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数都为16,在默认剩余数据包是携带CE标记的数据包的情况下,相当于可以用于指示网络状态的信息确定携带CE标记的数据包的数目是12。或者,UPF可生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包的数目为12、携带CE标记的数据包的负载比特数为48、携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数都为
16。
可选的,若方法300执行了S311,或者,TCP ACK#1指示了至少一个数据包的ECN标记,则UPF根据至少一个数据包的ECN标记和待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示网络状态的信息。
例如,假设根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度是60%,至少一个数据包的ECN标记为:携带CE标记的数据包数目为0、携带CE标记的数据包的负载比特数为0、携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数都为40。进而UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息满足如下条件:根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定的携带CE标记的数据包的数目与至少一个数据包的数目的比值是60%。
例如,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包的数目为12、携带CE标记的数据包的负载比特数为48、携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数都为16。或者,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包的数目为12、携带CE标记的数据包的负载比特数为48、携带ECT1标记的数据包的负载比特数为0、携带ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数为32。
S315,UPF向AS发送TCP ACK#2。相应的,AS接收来自UPF的TCP ACK#2。
UPF根据TCP ACK#1向AS发送TCP ACK#2,且TCP ACK#2包括用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息。
一种可能的实现方式中,若UE不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则UE向UPF发送的TCP ACK#1中r.cep、r.ceb、r.e0b和r.e1b没有取值或者取值为0。进而UPF根据生成的用于指示网络状态的信息为r.cep、r.ceb、r.e0b和r.e1b中的一个或多个赋值,生成TCP ACK#2。相当于,UPF在TCP ACK#1中添加用于指示网络状态的信息,生成TCP ACK#2。
例如,若UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包的数目为12,则UPF为TCP ACK#1中的r.cep赋值12,生成TCP ACK#2。又例如,若UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数都为16,则UPF为TCP ACK#1中的r.e0b和r.e1b都赋值16,生成TCP ACK#2。
一种可能的实现方式中,若UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则UE向UPF发送的TCP ACK#1中r.cep、r.ceb、r.e0b和r.e1b有取值。进而UPF根据生成的用于指示网络状态的信息修改r.cep、r.ceb、r.e0b和r.e1b中的一个或多个的取值,生成TCP ACK#2。相当于,UPF修改TCP ACK#1中的部分字段,生成TCP ACK#2。此时,方法300可以不执行S311。
例如,若TCP ACK#1中r.cep、r.ceb、r.e0b和r.e1b的取值分别为0、0、40、40,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包的数量为12、携带CE标记的数据包的负载比特数为48、携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数都为16,则UPF将TCP ACK#1中的r.cep、r.ceb、r.e0b和r.e1b的取值分别修改为12、48、16、16,生成TCP ACK#2。
AS接收到来自UPF的TCP ACK#2之后,则可以根据TCP ACK#2中包括的用于指示网络状态的信息,确定待监测业务流的网络状态。
例如,TCP ACK#2包括的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包的数
目为12,即TCP ACK#2中的r.cep的取值为12,则AS确定TCP ACK#2与至少一个数据包对应的情况下,AS根据携带CE标记的数据包数目(12)与至少一个数据包的数目(20)的比值确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度。例如,AS可以根据TCP ACK#2的TCP头部中的确认号字段确定至少一个数据包的数目。
又例如,TCP ACK#2包括的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包的数量为12,携带CE标记的数据包的负载比特数为48、携带ECT1标记的数据包的负载比特数为16、携带ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数为16,即TCP ACK#2中的r.cep、r.ceb、r.e0b和r.e1b的取值分别为12、48、16、16,则AS可以根据r.ceb、r.e0b和r.e1b的取值确定至少一个数据包的数目为20,根据r.cep的取值确定携带CE标记的数据包的数目为12,进而确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度为60%。
需要说明的是,除了r.cep、r.ceb、r.e0b和r.e1b中的一项或多项,TCP ACK#1与TCP ACK#2的其余字段相同。
进一步地,AS根据TCP ACK#2确定待监测业务流的网络状态的情况下,可以根据待监测业务流的网络状态调整待监测业务流的业务参数,如动态调整媒体业务的码率,实现网络状态信息的快速开放,以保证用户的业务体验,提升网络资源的有效利用率。
应理解,图3所示的方法中,各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。例如,S309既可以在S310之前执行,也可以在S313之后执行,或者S309可以在S310至S313之间执行。
在本申请实施例中,在待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是TCP的情况下,若UPF获取到待监测业务流的网络状态信息,则根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,进一步地,UPF从UE接收到TCP ACK#1之后,根据用于指示网络状态的信息对TCP ACK#1中的部分字段(即r.cep、r.ceb、r.e0b和r.e1b中的一个或多个)赋值,或者修改TCP ACK#1中的部分字段的取值,生成TCP ACK#2,使得TCP ACK#2包括用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,从而应用服务器可以根据TCP ACK#2确定待监测业务流的网络状态。根据本申请实施例提供的方法,即使在UE不支持使用TCP进行L4S反馈的情况下,也可以实现通过TCP层向AS开放待监测业务流的网络状态,从而使得AS根据待监测业务流的网络状态调整待监测业务流的业务参数,如通过调整编码配置适配媒体输出码率,以保证用户的业务体验,提升网络资源的有效利用率。
图6示出了本申请实施例提供的通信方法的示意性流程图。具体的,图6中以待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是QUIC协议为例,说明如何根据本申请实施例提供的方法实现通过传输层开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
如方法200中的S230所述,UPF根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示网络状态的信息的触发条件包括三种,在UPF基于不同的触发条件生成用于指示网络状态的信息的情况下,方法600包括的步骤也不同。
一种可能的实现方式中,若UPF在获取到待监测业务流的网络状态信息和第一传输层反馈消息的情况下生成用于指示网络状态的信息,则方法600可以包括S601至S604、S611和S612、S614至S617。
另一种可能的实现方式中,若UPF在接收到网络状态信息开放规则的情况下生成用于指示网络状态的信息,则方法600可以包括S601至S605、S611和S612、S614至S617。
再一种可能的实现方式中,若UPF在确定AS支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的情况下生成用于指示网络状态的信息,则方法600可以包括S601至S604、S606、S611和S612、S614至S617。
可选的,方法600还包括S606至S610。可选的,方法600还包括S613。
下面详细描述方法600包括的各个步骤。
S601,AF向PCF发送指示信息#1。相应的,PCF接收来自AF的指示信息#1。
S601可以参考方法300的S301中的描述。
在待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是QUIC协议的情况下,AF向PCF发送的指示信息#2可以用于指示介入UE与AS的ECN能力协商流程,或者指示介入UE与AS的L4S能力协商流程。AF向PCF发送的指示信息#3指示的对外开放规则包括:使用QUIC进行ECN反馈,或者使用QUIC进行L4S反馈。
S602,PCF生成PCC规则。
PCC规则的和PCF生成PCC规则的方式可以参考方法300的S302中的描述。
需要说明的是,在待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是QUIC协议的情况下,第一传输层反馈消息是QUIC ACK。QUIC ACK的内容结构如下所示:
其中,ECT0计数表示携带ECT0标记的数据包的数目,ECT1计数表示携带ECT1标记的数据包的数目,ECT-CE计数表示携带CE标记的数据包的数目。
根据上文所述的QUIC ACK内容结构示意,网络状态信息开放策略包括的检测来自UE的第一传输层反馈消息的方式包括:若来自UE的报文的帧格式中的类型参数为“0x02..0x03”,则该报文是QUIC ACK,即该报文是第一传输层反馈消息。
进而,在第一传输层反馈消息添加用于指示网络状态信息的方式包括:修改ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数中的一项或多项的取值,或者为ECT0计数、ECT1计数和
ECT-CE计数中的一项或多项赋值,使得ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数中的一项或多项用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态。
S603,PCF向SMF发送PCC规则。相应的,SMF接收来自PCF的PCC规则。
S603可以参考上文方法300的S303中的描述。
S604,SMF向RAN发送监测配置信息。相应的,RAN接收来自SMF的监测配置信息。
S604可以参考上文方法300的S304中的描述。
可选的,若SMF从PCF接收到网络状态信息开放策略,则方法600还包括S605。
S605,SMF向UPF发送网络状态信息开放规则。相应的,UPF接收来自SMF的网络状态信息开放规则。
S605可以参考上文方法300的S305中的描述。
可选的,若UPF接收到来自SMF的指示信息#2,则方法600还包括S606至S610。
S606,UPF接收来自AS的至少一个数据包#1。相应的,AS向UPF发送至少一个数据包#1。
至少一个数据包#1是待监测业务流中的数据包。
S607,UPF确定至少一个数据包#1的ECN标记。
具体的,UPF通过解析至少一个数据包#1中每个数据包#1的IP层确定至少一个数据包#1的ECN标记。UPF确定至少一个数据包#1的ECN标记的方式可以参考上文方法300的S311中的描述。
需要说明的是,UPF确定的至少一个数据包#1的ECN标记包括至少一个数据包#1中:携带CE标记的数据包#1的数目、携带ECT1标记的数据包#1的数目、携带ECT0标记的数据包#1的数目。
可选的,在S607中,UPF可以根据至少一个数据包#1确定AS是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。若至少一个数据包#1的IP层头部中的ECN字段的取值为“01”、“10”或“11”,则UPF确定AS支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,反之UPF确定AS不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
S608,UPF向UE发送至少一个数据包#1。相应的,UE接收来自UPF的至少一个数据包#1。
S609,UE向UPF发送QUIC ACK#1。相应的,UPF接收来自UE的QUIC ACK#1。
UE接收到至少一个数据包#1之后,则向UPF发送针对至少一个数据包#1的QUIC ACK#1(第一传输层数据包的示例)。相应的,UPF向UE发送至少一个数据包#1之后,若接收到来自UE的报文的帧格式中的类型参数为“0x02..0x03”,则UPF确定该报文是QUIC ACK#1。
S610,UPF向AS发送QUIC ACK#2。相应的,AS接收来自UPF的QUIC ACK#2。
具体的,UPF根据QUIC ACK#1向AS发送QUIC ACK#2(第二传输层数据包的示例),QUIC ACK#2包括用于指示支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的指示信息。相应的,AS根据QUIC ACK#2包括的用于指示支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的指示信息,确定UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。应理解,AS确定UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,并不代表UE实际上支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,而
是AS认为UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
根据S602所示的QUIC ACK的内容格式,当ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数的取值表征至少一个数据包#1的ECN标记时,ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数用于指示支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息。即UPF根据QUICACK#1向AS发送QUIC ACK#2时,根据至少一个数据包#1的ECN标记对QUIC ACK#1中的ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数赋值,生成QUIC ACK#2,并将QUIC ACK#2发送给AS。
例如,若UPF确定的至少一个数据包#1的ECN标记为至少一个数据包#1中:携带CE标记和ECT1标记的数据包#1的数目为0、携带ECT0标记的数据包#1的数目为10,则UPF对ECT0计数和ECT1计数赋值10,对ECT-CE计数赋值0。
可选的,在UPF向AF发送QUIC ACK#2之前,UPF根据QUIC ACK#1确定UE是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,即UPF确定QUIC ACK#1中的ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数的取值是否表征至少一个数据包#1的ECN标记。例如,若QUIC ACK#1中的ECT0计数和ECT1计数的取值为10,ECT-CE计数的取值为0,则UPF确定UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则UPF直接将QUIC ACK#1转发给AS,即QUIC ACK#2是QUIC ACK#1。若QUIC ACK#1中的ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数的取值不是10、10、0,则UPF根据至少一个数据包#1的ECN标记对QUIC ACK#1中的ECT0计数和ECT1计数赋值10,对ECT-CE计数赋值0,生成QUIC ACK#2。
S611,RAN向UPF发送网络状态信息。相应的,UPF接收来自RAN的网络状态信息。
S611可以参考上文方法300的S309中的描述。
S612,UPF接收来自AS的至少一个数据包#2。相应的,AS向UPF发送至少一个数据包#2。
需要说明的是,该至少一个数据包#2是待监测业务流中的数据包。至少一个数据包#2可以是UPF在接收网络状态信息之前接收到的,或者可以是在接收网络状态信息的时刻接收到的,或者可以是在接收网络状态信息之后接收到的。
S613,UPF确定至少一个数据包#2的ECN标记。
UPF确定至少一个数据包#2的ECN标记的方式与确定至少一个数据包#1的ECN标记的方式相同。
假设至少一个数据包#2包括20个数据包#2,UPF通过解析每个数据包#2的IP层,确定该20个数据包#2的ECN标记为:携带CE标记的数据包#2数目为0、携带ECT1标记的数据包#2的数目为10、携带ECT0标记的数据包#2的数目为10。
需要说明的是,若UPF在接收至少一个数据包#2之前,或者在接收至少一个数据包#2的时刻,接收到来自RAN的待监测业务流的网络状态信息,则UPF可以确定至少一个数据包#2的ECN标记,以便于UPF接收到来自UE的QUIC ACK#3之后,根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息和至少一个数据包#2的ECN标记向AS发送QUIC ACK#4。
还需要说明的是,若AS根据接收到的QUIC ACK#2确定UE支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力,则AS在至少一个数据包#2中添加ECN标记,以指示AS支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力,或者指示网络拥塞。例如,若至少一个数据包#2中携带的ECN标记是ECT0标记或ECT1标记,则至少一个数据包#2可以指示AS支持支持
通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力。若至少一个数据包#2中包括携带CE标记的数据包,则该至少一个数据包#2指示网络拥塞。
S614,UPF向UE发送至少一个数据包#2。相应的,UE接收至少一个数据包#2。
S615,UE向UPF发送QUIC ACK#3。相应的,UPF接收来自UE的QUIC ACK#3。
UE接收到至少一个数据包#2之后,则向UPF发送QUIC ACK#3(第一传输层反馈消息的示例)。相应的,UPF向UE发送至少一个数据包#2之后,若接收到来自UE的报文的帧格式中的类型参数为“0x02..0x03”,则UPF确定该报文是QUIC ACK#3。
可选的,若UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则UE可以确定至少一个数据包#2的ECN标记,并通过QUIC ACK#3反馈至少一个数据包#2的ECN标记。如S602所述,UE可以对QUIC ACK#3的ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数赋值,使得QUIC ACK#3可以指示至少一个数据包#2的ECN标记。例如,根据至少一个数据包#2的ECN标记,UE为ECT0计数和ECT1计数10,为ECT-CE计数赋值0。
需要说明的是,QUIC ACK#3是UPF接收到待监测业务流的网络状态信息的时刻接收到的,或者,QUIC ACK#3是UPF接收到待监测业务流的网络信息之后收到的。
S616,UPF根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示网络状态的信息。
用于指示网络状态的信息包括以下至少一项:携带CE标记的数据包#2的数目、携带ECT1标记的数据包#2的数目、或携带ECT0标记的数据包#2的数目。
具体的,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息满足如下条件:根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定的携带CE标记的数据包#2的数目与至少一个数据包#2的数目的比值,用于表征待监测业务流的网络状态。待监测业务流的网络状态是根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息确定的。
例如,若根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度是60%,则UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息满足如下条件:根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定的携带CE标记的数据包#2的数目与至少一个数据包#2的数目的比值是60%。
例如,在至少一个数据包#2包括20个数据包的情况下,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包#2的数目为12。或者,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带ECT1标记的数据包#2的数目为8,则在默认剩余数据包#2是携带CE标记的数据包#2的情况下,相当于可以根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定携带CE标记的数据包#2的数目是12。或者,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包#2的数目都为4,在默认剩余数据包是携带CE标记的数据包#2的情况下,相当于可以根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定携带CE标记的数据包#2的数目是12。
可选的,若方法600执行了S613,或者,QUIC ACK#2指示了至少一个数据包#2的ECN标记,则UPF根据至少一个数据包#2的ECN标记和待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示网络状态的信息。
例如,假设根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度是60%,至少一个数据包#2的ECN标记为:携带CE标记的数据包#2的数目为0、携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包的数目都为10。进而UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息满足如下条件:根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定的携带CE标记的数据包#2的数目与至少一
个数据包#2的数目的比值是60%。
例如,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包#2的数目为12、携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包#2的数目都为4。或者,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包#2的数目为12、携带ECT1标记的数据包#2的数目为0、携带ECT0标记的数据包#2的数目为8。
S617,UPF向AS发送QUIC ACK#4。相应的,AS接收来自UPF的QUIC ACK#4。
UPF根据QUIC ACK#3向AS发送QUIC ACK#4,且QUIC ACK#4包括用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息。
一种可能的实现方式中,若UE不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则UE向UPF发送的QUIC ACK#3中的ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数没有取值或者取值为0。进而UPF根据生成的用于指示网络状态的信息为ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数中的一个或多个赋值,生成QUIC ACK#4。相当于,UPF在QUIC ACK#3中添加用于指示网络状态的信息,生成QUIC ACK#4。
例如,若UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包#2的数目为12,则UPF为QUIC ACK#3中的ECT-CE计数赋值12,生成QUIC ACK#4。又例如,若UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包#2的数目都为4,则UPF为QUIC ACK#3中的ECT0计数和ECT1计数都赋值4,生成QUIC ACK#4。
一种可能的实现方式中,若UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则UE向UPF发送的QUIC ACK#3中ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数有取值。进而UPF根据生成的用于指示网络状态的信息修改ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数中的一个或多个的取值,生成QUIC ACK#4。相当于,UPF修改QUIC ACK#3中的部分字段,生成QUIC ACK#4。
例如,若QUIC ACK#3中ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数的取值分别为10、10、0,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包#2的数量为12、携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包#2的数目都为4,则UPF将QUCI ACK#3中的ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数的取值分别修改为4、4、12,生成QUIC ACK#4。
AS接收到来自UPF的QUIC ACK#4之后,则可以根据QUIC ACK#4中包括的用于指示网络状态的信息,确定待监测业务流的网络状态。
例如,QUIC ACK#4包括的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包#2的数目为12,即QUIC ACK#4中的ECT-CE计数的取值为12,则AS确定QUIC ACK#4与至少一个数据包#2对应的情况下,AS根据携带CE标记的数据包#2数目(12)与至少一个数据包#2的数目(20)的比值确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度。例如,AS可以根据QUIC ACK#4中的“ACK范围计数”确定至少一个数据包#2的数目。
又例如,QUIC ACK#4包括的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包#2的数量为12、携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包#2的数目都为4,即QUIC ACK#4中的ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数的取值分别为4、4、12,则AS可以根据ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数的取值确定至少一个数据包#2的数目为20,根据ECT-CE计数的取值确定携带CE标记的数据包#2的数目为12,进而确定待监测业务流的拥塞程
度为60%。
需要说明的是,除了ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数中的一项或多项,QUIC ACK#3与QUIC ACK#4的其余字段相同。
进一步地,AS根据QUIC ACK#4确定待监测业务流的网络状态的情况下,可以根据待监测业务流的网络状态调整待监测业务流的业务参数,如通过动态调整编码配置改变码率,以保证用户的业务体验,提升网络资源的有效利用率。
应理解,图6所示的方法中,各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。例如,S611既可以在S612之前执行,也可以在S615之后执行,或者S611可以在S612至S615之间执行。
在本申请实施例中,在待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是QUIC协议的情况下,若UPF获取到待监测业务流的网络状态信息,则根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,进一步地,UPF从UE接收到QUIC ACK#3之后,根据用于指示网络状态的信息对QUIC ACK#3中的部分字段(即ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数中的一个或多个)赋值,或者修改QUIC ACK#3中的部分字段的取值,生成QUIC ACK#4,使得QUIC ACK#4包括用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,从而应用服务器可以根据QUIC ACK#4确定待监测业务流的网络状态。根据本申请实施例提供的方法,即使在UE不支持使用QUIC进行ECN反馈的情况下,也可以实现通过QUIC层向AS开放待监测业务流的网络状态,从而使得AS根据待监测业务流的网络状态调整待监测业务流的业务参数,如动态调整媒体编码配置以改变码率,以保证用户的业务体验,提升网络资源的有效利用率。
图7示出了本申请实施例提供的通信方法的示意性流程图。具体的,图7中以待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是RTP或RTCP为例,说明如何根据本申请实施例提供的方法实现通过传输层开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
如方法200中的S230所述,UPF根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示网络状态的信息的触发条件包括三种,在UPF基于不同的触发条件生成用于指示网络状态的信息的情况下,方法700包括的步骤也不同。
一种可能的实现方式中,若UPF在获取到待监测业务流的网络状态信息和第一传输层反馈消息的情况下生成用于指示网络状态的信息,则方法700可以包括S701至S704、S710和S711、S713至S716。
另一种可能的实现方式中,若UPF在接收到网络状态信息开放规则的情况下生成用于指示网络状态的信息,则方法700可以包括S701至S705、S710和S711、S713至S716。
再一种可能的实现方式中,若UPF在确定AS支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的情况下生成用于指示网络状态的信息,则方法700可以包括S701至S704、S706、S710和S711、S713至S716。
可选的,方法700还包括S707至S709。可选的,方法700还包括S712。
下面详细描述方法700包括的各个步骤。
S701,AF向PCF发送指示信息#1。相应的,PCF接收来自AF的指示信息#1。
S701可以参考方法300的S301中的描述。
在待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是RTP或RTCP的情况下,AF向PCF发送的指示信息#2可以用于指示介入UE与AS的ECN能力协商流程,或者指示介入UE与AS的L4S能力协商流程。AF向PCF发送的指示信息#3指示的对外开放规则包括:使用RTP或RTCP进行ECN反馈,或者使用RTP或RTCP进行L4S反馈。
S702,PCF生成PCC规则。
PCC规则的和PCF生成PCC规则的方式可以参考方法300的S302中的描述。
需要说明的是,在待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是RTP或RTCP的情况下,第一传输层反馈消息是RTCP反馈报告,图8示出了RTCP反馈报告的格式示意图,如图8中的(a)所示,RTCP反馈报告包括如下字段:版本(version,V)、填充位(padding,P)、反馈信息类型(feedback message type,FMT)、数据类型(packet type,PT)、长度(length)、包发送者的同步源(SSRC of packet sender)、媒体源的同步源(SSRC of media source)、反馈控制信息(feedback control information,FCI)。其中,V=2表示RTP当前的版本为2,PT=RTPFB=205表示该RTCP反馈报告的数据类型是205,即是RTP反馈(RTP feedback,RTPFB)。如图4中的(b)所示,FCI还包括如下参数:扩展的最大序列号(extended highest sequence number)、ECT(0)计数器(Counter)、ECT(1)计数器、ECN-CE计数器、not-ECT计数器、丢包(lost packets)计数器、或重复(duplication)计数器。
其中,ECT(0)计数器表示携带ECT0标记的数据包的数目,ECT(1)计数器表示携带ECT1标记的数据包的数目,ECT-CE计数器表示携带CE标记的数据包的数目,not-ECT计数器表示未携带ECN标记的数据包的数目,丢包计数器表示丢包数目,重复计数器表示重复数据包数目。
根据图8中的(a)所示RTP反馈报告的格式,网络状态信息开放策略包括的检测来自UE的第一传输层反馈消息的方式包括:若来自UE的报文中的PT字段为205,则该报文是RTCP反馈报告,即该报文是第一传输层反馈消息。
进而,在第一传输层反馈消息添加用于指示网络状态信息的方式包括:修改计数器的取值,或者为计数器赋值,使得计数器用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态。其中,计数器包括以下计数器中的一个或多个:ECT(0)计数器、ECT(1)计数器、ECN-CE计数器、not-ECT计数器、丢包计数器、或重复计数器。
S703,PCF向SMF发送PCC规则。相应的,SMF接收来自PCF的PCC规则。
S703可以参考上文方法300的S303中的描述。
S704,SMF向RAN发送监测配置信息。相应的,RAN接收来自SMF的监测配置信息。
S704可以参考上文方法300的S304中的描述。
可选的,若SMF从PCF接收到网络状态信息开放策略,则方法700还包括S705。
S705,SMF向UPF发送网络状态信息开放规则。相应的,UPF接收来自SMF的网络状态信息开放规则。
S705可以参考上文方法300的S305中的描述。
可选的,若UPF接收到来自SMF的指示信息#2,则方法700还包括S706至S709。
S706,UPF接收来自AS的下行会话描述协议(session description protocol,SDP)信息。相应的,AS向UPF发送下行SDP信息。
下行SDP信息用于AS与UE协商是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信的能力。
可选的,在S706中,UPF可以根据下行SDP信息确定AS是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。若下行SDP信息包括参数“ecn-capable-rtp”,则UPF确定AS支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,反之UPF确定AS不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
S707,UPF向UE发送下行SDP信息。相应的,UE接收来自UPF的下行SDP信息。
S708,UE向UPF发送上行SDP信息#1。相应的,UPF接收来自UE的上行SDP信息#1。
UE接收到下行SDP信息之后,则向UPF发送上行SDP信息#1(第一传输层数据包的示例)。上行SDP信息#1用于AS与UE协商是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信的能力。
S709,UPF向AS发送上行SDP信息#2。相应的,AS接收来自UPF的上行SDP信息#2。
具体的,UPF根据上行SDP信息#1向AS发送上行SDP信息#2(第二传输层数据包的示例),上行SDP信息#2包括用于指示支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的指示信息。相应的,AS根据上行SDP信息#2包括的用于指示支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的指示信息,确定UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。应理解,AS确定UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,并不代表UE实际上支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,而是AS认为UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
其中,上行SDP信息#2包括的用于指示支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的指示信息为参数“ecn-fb-nack-param=/ecn-fb-par&ecn-fb-par=SP“ecn””。即UPF根据上行SDP信息#1向AS发送上行SDP信息#2时,在上行SDP信息#1中添加参数“ecn-fb-nack-param=/ecn-fb-par&ecn-fb-par=SP“ecn””,生成上行SDP信息#2,并将上行SDP信息#2发送给AS。
可选的,在UPF向AF发送上行SDP信息#2之前,UPF根据上行SDP信息#1确定UE是否支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,即UPF确定上行SDP信息#1中是否包括参数“ecn-fb-nack-param=/ecn-fb-par&ecn-fb-par=SP“ecn””。若上行SDP信息#1中的包括上述参数,则UPF确定UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则UPF直接将上行SDP信息#1转发给AS,即上行SDP信息#2是上行SDP信息#1。若上行SDP信息#1中不包括上述参数,则UPF在上行SDP信息#1中添加上述参数,生成上行SDP信息#2。
S710,RAN向UPF发送网络状态信息。相应的,UPF接收来自RAN的网络状态信息。
S710可以参考上文方法300的S309中的描述。
S711,UPF接收来自AS的至少一个数据包。相应的,AS向UPF发送至少一个数据包。
需要说明的是,该至少一个数据包是待监测业务流中的数据包,至少一个数据包可以是UPF在接收网络状态信息之前接收到的,或者可以是在接收网络状态信息的时刻接收到的,或者可以是在接收网络状态信息之后接收到的。
S712,UPF确定至少一个数据包的ECN标记。
S712可以参考上文方法600的S613中的描述
需要说明的是,若UPF在接收至少一个数据包之前,或者在接收至少一个数据包的时刻,接收到来自RAN的待监测业务流的网络状态信息,则UPF可以确定至少一个数据包的ECN标记,以便于UPF接收到来自UE的RTCP反馈报告#1之后,根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息和至少一个数据包的ECN标记向AS发送RTCP反馈报告#2。
还需要说明的是,若AS根据接收到的上行SDP信息#2确定UE支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力,则AS在至少一个数据包中添加ECN标记,以指示AS支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力,或者指示网络拥塞。例如,若至少一个数据包中携带的ECN标记是ECT0标记或ECT1标记,则至少一个数据包可以指示AS支持支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力。若至少一个数据包中包括携带CE标记的数据包,则该至少一个数据包指示网络拥塞。
S713,UPF向UE发送至少一个数据包。相应的,UE接收至少一个数据包。
S714,UE向UPF发送RTCP反馈报告#1。相应的,UPF接收来自UE的RTCP反馈报告#1。
UE接收到至少一个数据包之后,则向UPF发送RTCP反馈报告#1(第一传输层反馈消息的示例)。相应的,UPF向UE发送至少一个数据包之后,若接收到来自UE的报文中的PT字段为205,则UPF确定该报文是RTCP反馈报告#1。
可选的,若UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则UE可以确定至少一个数据包的ECN标记,并通过RTCP反馈报告#1反馈至少一个数据包的ECN标记。如S702所述,UE可以对RTCP反馈报告#1的计数器赋值,使得RTCP反馈报告#1可以指示至少一个数据包的ECN标记,计数器包括以下计数器中的一个或多个:ECT(0)计数器、ECT(1)计数器、ECN-CE计数器、not-ECT计数器。例如,根据至少一个数据包的ECN标记,UE为ECT(0)计数器和ECT(1)计数器赋值10,为ECT-CE计数器赋值0,为not-ECT计数器赋值0。
可选的,若UE检测到丢包和/或重复收包,则UE可以根据丢包情况对丢包计数器赋值,根据重复收包情况对重复计数器赋值。
需要说明的是,RTCP反馈报告#1是UPF接收到待监测业务流的网络状态信息的时刻接收到的,或者,RTCP反馈报告#1是UPF接收到待监测业务流的网络信息之后收到的。
S715,UPF根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示网络状态的信息。
用于指示网络状态的信息包括以下至少一项:携带CE标记的数据包的数目、携带ECT1标记的数据包的数目、携带ECT0标记的数据包的数目、未携带ECN标记的数据包数目、丢包数目、或重复收到的数据包数目。
具体的,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息满足如下条件:根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定的携带CE标记的数据包的数目与至少一个数据包的数目的比值,用于表征待监测业务流的网络状态;或者,根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定的丢包数目与至少一个数据包的数目的比值,用于表征待监测业务流的网络状态。待监测业务流的网络状态是根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息确定的。
例如,若根据待监测业务流的网络状态信确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度是60%,则UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息满足如下条件:根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定的携带CE标记的数据包的数目与至少一个数据包的数目的比值是60%;或者,根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定的丢包数目与至少一个数据包的数目的比值是60%。
例如,在至少一个数据包包括20个数据包的情况下,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包的数目为12。或者,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带ECT1标记的数据包的数目为8,在默认剩余数据包是携带CE标记的数据包的情况下,相当于可以根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定携带CE标记的数据包的数目是12。或者,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:丢包数目为12。或者,UPF可生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:丢包数目为12、携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包#2的数目都为4。
可选的,若方法700执行了S712,或者,RTCP反馈包括#1指示了至少一个数据包的ECN标记,则UPF根据至少一个数据包的ECN标记和待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示网络状态的信息。
例如,假设根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度是60%,至少一个数据包的ECN标记为:携带CE标记的数据包的数目为0、携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包的数目都为10、未携带ECN标记的数据包数目为0。进而UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息满足如下条件:根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定的携带CE标记的数据包的数目与至少一个数据包的数目的比值是60%;或者,根据用于指示网络状态的信息确定的丢包数目与至少一个数据包的数目的比值是60%。
例如,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包的数目为12、携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包的数目都为4、未携带ECN标记的数据包数目为0。或者,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:丢包数目为12、携带ECT1标记的数据包的数目为0、携带ECT0标记的数据包的数目为8、未携带ECN标记的数据包数目为0。
S716,UPF向AS发送RTCP反馈报告#2。相应的,AS接收来自UPF的RTCP反馈报告#2。
UPF根据RTCP反馈报告#1向AS发送RTCP反馈报告#2,且RTCP反馈报告#2包括用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息。
一种可能的实现方式中,若UE不支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则UE向UPF发送的RTCP反馈报告#2中的计数器没有取值或者取值为0,计数器包括以下计数器中的一个或多个:ECT(0)计数器、ECT(1)计数器、ECN-CE计数器、not-ECT计数器、丢包计数器、或重复计数器。进而UPF根据生成的用于指示网络状态的信息为计数器赋值,生成RTCP反馈报告#2。相当于,UPF在RTCP反馈报告#1中添加用于指示网络状态的信息,生成RTCP反馈报告#2。
例如,若UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包的数目为12,则UPF为RTCP反馈报告#1中的ECT-CE计数器赋值12,生成RTCP反馈报告#2。又例如,若UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:丢包数目为12、携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包#2的数目都为4,则UPF为RTCP反馈报告#1中的ECT(0)计数器和ECT(1)计数器都赋值4,为丢包计数器赋值12,生成RTCP反馈报告#2。
一种可能的实现方式中,若UE支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力,则UE向UPF发送的RTCP反馈报告#1中计数器有取值。进而UPF根据生成的用于指示网络状态的信息修改计数器的取值,生成RTCP反馈报告#2。相当于,UPF修改RTCP反馈报告#1中的部分字段,生成RTCP反馈报告#2。
例如,若RTCP反馈报告#1中ECT(0)计数器、ECT(1)计数器、ECN-CE计数器、not-ECT计数器、丢包计数器、重复计数器的取值分别为10、10、0、0、0、0,UPF生成的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包的数目为12、携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包的数目都为4,则UPF将RTCP反馈报告#1中的ECT(0)计数器、ECT(1)计数器、ECN-CE计数器的取值分别修改为4、4、12,生成RTCP反馈报告#2。
AS接收到来自UPF的RTCP反馈报告#2之后,则可以根据RTCP反馈报告#2中包括的用于指示网络状态的信息,确定待监测业务流的网络状态。
例如,RTCP反馈报告#2包括的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:携带CE标记的数据包的数目为12,即RTCP反馈报告#2中的ECT-CE计数器的取值为12,则AS确定RTCP反馈报告#2与至少一个数据包对应的情况下,AS根据携带CE标记的数据包数目(12)与至少一个数据包的数目(20)的比值确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度。
又例如,RTCP反馈报告#2包括的用于指示网络状态的信息包括:丢包数目为12、携带ECT1标记和ECT0标记的数据包的数目都为4、携带CE标记的数据包的数目为0、未携带ECN标记的数据包的数目为0、重复收到的数据包数目为0,即RTCP反馈报告#2中的ECT(0)计数器、ECT(1)计数器、ECN-CE计数器、not-ECT计数器、丢包计数器、重复计数器的取值分别为4、4、0、0、12、0,则AS可以根据计数器的取值确定至少一个数据包的数目为20,丢包数目为12,进而确定待监测业务流的丢包率(或者说拥塞程度)为60%。
需要说明的是,除了ECT(0)计数器、ECT(1)计数器、ECN-CE计数器、not-ECT计数器、丢包计数器、重复计数器中的一项或多项,RTCP反馈报告#1与RTCP反馈报告#2的其余字段相同。
进一步地,AS根据RTCP反馈报告#2确定待监测业务流的网络状态的情况下,可以根据待监测业务流的网络状态调整待监测业务流的业务参数,如动态调整媒体编码配置以改变码率,以保证用户的业务体验,提升网络资源的有效利用率。
应理解,图7所示的方法中,各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。例如,S710既可以在S711之前执行,也可以在S714之后执行,或者S710可以在S711至S714之间执行。
在本申请实施例中,在待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是RTP或RTCP协议的情况下,若UPF获取到待监测业务流的网络状态信息,则根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,进一步地,UPF从UE接收到RTCP反馈报告#1之后,根据用于指示网络状态的信息对RTCP反馈报告#1中的一个或多个计数器赋值,或者修改一个或多个计数器的取值,生成RTCP反馈报告#2,使得RTCP反馈报告#2包括用于指示待监测业务流的网络状态的信息,从而应用服务器可以根据RTCP反馈报告#2确定待监测业务流的网络状态。根据本申请实施例提供的方法,即使在UE不支持
使用RTP或RTCP进行ECN反馈的情况下,也可以实现通过RTP或RTCP向AS开放待监测业务流的网络状态,从而使得AS根据待监测业务流的网络状态调整待监测业务流的业务参数,如动态调整媒体编码配置以改变码率,以保证用户的业务体验,提升网络资源的有效利用率。
基于图3、图6或图7所示的方法,可以在不考虑终端设备能力的情况下,实现通过传输层向应用服务器开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息。在终端设备支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的情况下,还可以根据下文图9示出的方法实现通过传输层向应用服务器开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
图9示出了本申请实施例提供的通信方法的示意性流程图。下面详细描述方法900包括的各个步骤。
S901,AF向PCF发送指示信息#1。相应的,PCF接收来自AF的指示信息#1。
关于指示信息#1的描述可以参考上文方法300的S301。
S902,PCF生成PCC规则。
PCC规则包括待监测业务流的监测策略,待监测业务流的监测策略用于确定待监测业务流的监测配置信息,监测配置信息可以参考上文方法200的S210中的描述。监测策略可以参考上文方法200的S210和方法300的S302中的描述。
可选的,PCC规则还包括网络状态信息开放策略,网络状态信息开放策略包括以下一项或多项:接收来自RAN的待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、或用于指示根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记的指示信息。至少一个数据包是待监测业务流中的数据包。
S903,PCF向SMF发送PCC规则。相应的,SMF接收来自PCF的PCC规则。
S903可以参考上文方法300的S303中的描述。
S904,SMF向RAN发送监测配置信息。相应的,RAN接收来自SMF的监测配置信息。
S904可以参考上文方法300的S304中的描述。
可选的,若SMF从PCF接收到网络状态信息开放策略,则方法900还包括S905。
S905,SMF向UPF发送网络状态信息开放规则。相应的,UPF接收来自SMF的网络状态信息开放规则。
网络状态信息开放规则包括:接收来自RAN的待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、或用于指示指示对外开放规则的指示信息。
更多关于S905的描述可以参考上文方法300中的S305。
S906,RAN向UPF发送网络状态信息。相应的,UPF接收来自RAN的网络状态信息。
S906可以参考上文方法300中的S309。
需要说明的是,方法900以UPF从RAN接收待监测业务流的网络状态信息为例进行说明。若UPF接收到待监测业务流的监测配置信息,则UPF也可以根据监测配置信息监测待监测业务流的网络状态,从而获得待监测业务流的网络状态信息。
S907,AS向UPF发送至少一个数据包。相应的,UPF接收来自AS的至少一个数据包。
该至少一个数据包是待监测业务流中的数据包,该至少一个数据包可以是UPF在接收到待监测业务流的网络状态信息的时刻接收到的,或者是接收到待监测业务流的网络状态信息之后接收到的。
S908,UPF根据网络状态信息在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记。
一种可能的实现方式中,UPF在接收到待监测业务流的网络状态信息和至少一个数据包之后,根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记。
另一种可能的实现方式中,若UPF接收到的网络状态信息开放规则包括用于指示根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记的指示信息,则UPF在接收到待监测业务流的网络状态信息和至少一个数据包之后,根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记。
示例性的,UPF在至少一个数据包的IP头部添加CE标记,即UPF将至少一个数据包的IP头部的ECN字段置为“11”。
示例性的,UPF根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息在至少一个数据包中概率性添加CE标记。UPF在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记的概率是根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息确定的。例如,若UPF根据网络状态信息确定待监测业务流没有发生拥塞,则UPF在至少一个数据包中每个数据包都不添加CE标记。即UPF在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记的概率是0。又例如,若UPF根据网络状态信息确定待监测业务流发生拥塞,则UPF在至少一个数据包中每个数据包中添加CE标记,即UPF在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记的概率是100%。再例如,若UPF根据拥塞信息确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度是60%,则UPF随机地在至少一个数据包中的60%个数据包中添加CE标记,即UPF在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记的概率是60%。
以至少一个数据包包括20个数据包为例,若UPF根据网络状态信息确定待监测业务流的拥塞程度是60%,则UPF随机地在12个数据包中添加CE标记。
S909,UPF向UE发送至少一个数据包。相应的,UE接收来自UPF的至少一个数据包。
S910,UE向AS发送传输层反馈消息。相应的,AS接收来自UE的传输层反馈消息。
UE接收到来自UPF的至少一个数据包之后,通过解析至少一个数据包的IP层确定至少一个数据包的ECN标记,并将至少一个数据包的ECN标记携带在传输层反馈消息中发送给AS。
例如,若待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是TCP,则UE统计至少一个数据包中携带CE标记的数据包的数目和负载比特数、携带ECT1标记的数据包的负载比特数和携带ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数,进而UE根据统计结果对TCP ACK中的r.cep、r.ceb、r.e1b和r.e0b赋值之后,将TCP ACK发送给AS。
例如,若待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是QUIC协议,则UE统计至少一个数据包中携带CE标记的数据包的数目、携带ECT1标记的数据包的数目和携带ECT0标记的数据包的数目,进而UE根据统计结果对QUIC ACK中的ECT0计数、ECT1计数和ECT-CE计数赋值之后,将QUIC ACK发送给AS。
例如,若待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是RTP或RTCP,则UE统计至少一个数据包中携带CE标记的数据包的数目、携带ECT1标记的数据包的数目、携带ECT0标记的
数据包的数目、未携带ECN标记的数据包的数目、丢包数目和重复数据包数目,进而UE根据统计结果对RTCP反馈报告中的ECT(0)计数器、ECT(1)计数器、ECT-CE计数器、not-ECT计数器、丢包计数器和重复计数器赋值之后,将RTCP反馈报告发送给AS。
AS接收到传输层反馈消息之后,可以根据传输层反馈消息确定待监测业务流的网络状态。AS根据传输层反馈消息确定待监测业务流的网络状态的方式可以参考上文方法300的S315、方法600的S617和方法700的S716。
在本申请实施例中,若UPF获取到待监测业务流的网络状态信息,则根据待监测业务流的网络状态信息在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记,并将至少一个数据包发送给UE。进而,UE统计至少一个数据包的ECN标记,通过传输层反馈消息将统计结果反馈给AS,使得AS可以根据至少一个数据包的ECN标记确定待监测业务流的网络状态。从而使得AS根据待监测业务流的网络状态调整待监测业务流的业务参数,如动态调整媒体编码配置以改变码率,以保证用户的业务体验,提升网络资源的有效利用率。
此外,根据本申请实施例提供的方法,RAN可以将待监测业务流的网络状态信息发送给UPF,再由UPF通过在至少一个数据包中添加CE标记的方式将网络状态信息开放给AS。相比于RAN通过在下行数据包的IP层头部添加ECN标记以开放网络状态信息的方式,由于不需要RAN解析下行数据包的IP层头部,因此安全性更高。
图10是本申请实施例提供的通信装置1000的示意性框图。如图10所示,该通信装置1000可以包括:收发单元1010和处理单元1020。
在一种可能的设计中,该通信装置1000可以是上文方法实施例中的用户面网元,也可以是用于实现上文方法实施例中用户面网元的功能的芯片。
应理解,该通信装置1000可对应于本申请实施例方法200、方法300、方法600、方法700或方法900中的用户面网元,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300、图6中的方法600、图7中的方法700或图9中的方法900中的用户面网元执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300、图6中的方法600、图7中的方法700或图9中的方法900的相应流程。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
在另一种可能的设计中,该通信装置1000可以是上文方法实施例中的会话管理网元,也可以是用于实现上文方法实施例中会话管理网元的功能的芯片。
应理解,该通信装置1000可对应于本申请实施例方法200、方法300、方法600、方法700或方法900中的会话管理网元,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300、图6中的方法600、图7中的方法700或图9中的方法900中的会话管理网元执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300、图6中的方法600、图7中的方法700或图9中的方法900的相应流程。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
在另一种可能的设计中,该通信装置1000可以是上文方法实施例中的策略控制功能网,也可以是用于实现上文方法实施例中策略控制功能网的功能的芯片。
应理解,该通信装置1000可对应于本申请实施例方法200、方法300、方法600、方
法700或方法900中的策略控制功能网元,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300、图6中的方法600、图7中的方法700或图9中的方法900中的策略控制功能网执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300、图6中的方法600、图7中的方法700或图9中的方法900的相应流程。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
在另一种可能的设计中,该通信装置1000可以是上文方法实施例中的应用服务器,也可以是用于实现上文方法实施例中应用服务器的功能的芯片。
应理解,该通信装置1000可对应于本申请实施例方法200、方法300、方法600、方法700或方法900中的应用服务器,该通信装置1000可以包括用于执行图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300、图6中的方法600、图7中的方法700或图9中的方法900中的应用服务器执行的方法的单元。并且,该通信装置1000中的各单元和上述其他操作和/或功能分别为了实现图2中的方法200、图3中的方法300、图6中的方法600、图7中的方法700或图9中的方法900的相应流程。应理解,各单元执行上述相应步骤的具体过程在上述方法实施例中已经详细说明,为了简洁,在此不再赘述。
还应理解,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1010或处理单元1020可以称为获取单元,或者,该收发单元1010和处理单元1020合设的单元称为获取单元。
还应理解,该通信装置1000中的收发单元1010可对应图11中示出的通信设备2000中的收发器2020,该通信装置1000中的处理单元1020可对应于图11中示出的通信设备2000中的处理器2010。
还应理解,当该通信装置1000为芯片时,该芯片包括收发单元。可选地,该芯片还可以包括处理单元。其中,收发单元可以是输入输出电路或通信接口;处理单元可以为该芯片上集成的处理器或微处理器或者集成电路。
收发单元1010用于实现通信装置1000的信号的收发操作,处理单元1020用于实现通信装置1000的信号的处理操作。
可选地,该通信装置还包括存储单元1030,该存储单元1030用于存储指令。
图11是本申请实施例提供的通信设备2000的示意性框图。如图11所示,该通信设备2000包括:至少一个处理器2010和收发器2020。该处理器2010与存储器耦合,用于执行存储器中存储的指令,以控制收发器2020发送信号和/或接收信号。可选地,该通信设备2000还包括存储器2030,用于存储指令。
应理解,上述处理器2010和存储器2030可以合成一个处理装置,处理器2010用于执行存储器2030中存储的程序代码来实现上述功能。具体实现时,该存储器2030也可以集成在处理器2010中,或者独立于处理器2010中。
还应理解,收发器2020可以包括接收器(或者称,接收机)和发射器(或者称,发射机)。收发器2020还可以进一步包括天线,天线的数量可以为一个或多个。收发器2020又可以是天线接口或者接口电路。
当该通信设备2000为芯片时,该芯片包括收发单元和处理单元。其中,收发单元可以是输入输出电路或通信接口;处理单元可以为该芯片上集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。
图12是本申请实施例的一种芯片***的示意图。这里的芯片***也可为电路组成的***。图12所示的芯片***3000包括:逻辑电路3010以及输入/输出接口(input/output interface)3020,所述逻辑电路用于与输入接口耦合,通过所述输入/输出接口传输数据,以执行图2、图3、图6、图7或图9所述的方法。
本申请实施例还提供了一种处理装置,包括处理器和接口。所述处理器可用于执行上述方法实施例中的方法。
应理解,上述处理装置可以是一个芯片。例如,该处理装置可以是现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA),可以是专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC),还可以是***芯片(system on chip,SoC),还可以是中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU),还可以是网络处理器(network processor,NP),还可以是数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU),还可以是可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其他集成芯片。
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以执行体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机寄存器,闪存、只读存储器,可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器,处理器读取存储器中的信息,结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤,为避免重复,这里不再详细描述。
应注意,本申请实施例中的处理器可以是一种集成电路芯片,具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中,上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
可以理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括:计算机程序代码,当该计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图2、图3、图6、图7或图9所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质存储有程序代码,当该程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得该计算机执行图2、图3、图6、图7或图9所示实施例中任意一个实施例的方法。
根据本申请实施例提供的方法,本申请还提供一种***,其包括前述的应用服务器和用户面网元。可选地,该***还包括前述的会话管理网元。可选地,该***还包括前述的策略控制网元。
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现,当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disc,SSD))等。
在本申请所提及的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的***、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个***,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其他的形式。
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。
Claims (30)
- 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:用户面网元获取待监测业务流的网络状态信息;所述用户面网元接收来自终端设备的第一传输层反馈消息,所述第一传输层反馈消息与所述待监测业务流中的至少一个数据包对应;所述用户面网元根据所述第一传输层反馈消息向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息,所述第二传输层反馈消息包括用于指示所述待监测业务流的网络状态的信息。
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述用户面网元根据所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息以及根据所述至少一个数据包的显示拥塞通知ECN标记,生成所述用于指示所述待监测业务流的网络状态的信息。
- 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述用户面网元接收来自所述应用服务器的所述至少一个数据包;所述用户面网元确定所述至少一个数据包的ECN标记。
- 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述用户面网元从所述第一传输层反馈消息中获取所述至少一个数据包的ECN标记。
- 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是传输控制协议,所述用于指示所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息包括以下至少一项:携带拥塞经历CE标记的数据包的数目、携带CE标记的数据包的负载比特数、携带显示拥塞通知能力传输ECT1标记的数据包的负载比特数、或携带ECT0标记的数据包的负载比特数。
- 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是快速用户数据报协议互联网连接协议,所述用于指示所述待监测业务流的网络信息的信息包括以下至少一项:携带CE标记的数据包的数目、携带ECT1标记的数据包的数目、或携带ECT0标记的数据包的数目。
- 根据权利要求1至4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述待监测业务流使用的传输层协议是实时传输协议或实时传输控制协议,所述用于指示所述待监测业务流的网络信息的信息包括以下至少一项:携带ECT1标记的数据包的数目、携带ECT0标记的数据包的数目、携带CE标记的数据包的数目、丢包数目、重复收到的数据包的数目、或未携带ECN标记的数据包的数目。
- 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述用户面网元接收来自所述终端设备的第一传输层数据包,所述第一传输层数据包与所述待监测业务流对应;所述用户面网元根据所述第一传输层数据包向所述应用服务器发送第二传输层数据包,所述第二传输层数据包包括用于指示支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的指示信息。
- 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述用户面网元确定所述第一传输层数据包包括用于指示不支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的指示信息。
- 根据权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:在所述应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力的情况下,所述用户面网元根据所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息生成用于指示所述待监测业务流的网络状态的信息。
- 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述用户面网元接收来自所述应用服务器的TCP连接建立消息;所述用户面网元根据所述TCP连接建立消息的TCP头部中的精准ECN、拥塞窗口降低位和ECN回应位三个比特位的取值,确定所述应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
- 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述用户面网元接收来自所述应用服务器的数据包;所述用户面网元根据所述数据包的因特网协议IP头部的ECN字段的取值,确定所述应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
- 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述用户面网元接收来自所述应用服务器的下行会话描述协议信息;所述用户面网元根据所述下行会话描述协议信息,确定所述应用服务器支持通过传输层开放网络状态信息的能力。
- 根据权利要求1至13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述用户面网元接收来自会话管理网元的网络状态信息开放规则,所述网络状态信息开放规则用于确定通过传输层开放所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式。
- 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络状态信息开放规则包括以下一项或多项:用于指示介入所述终端设备与所述应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息、用于指示所述待监测业务流使用的传输层协议的指示信息、从所述接入网设备接收所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、检测所述第一传输层反馈消息的方式、或在所述第一传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息的方式,所述传输层能力协商流程用于确定是否支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息。
- 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:策略控制功能网元接收来自应用功能网元的用于指示通过传输层对外开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息的指示信息;所述策略控制功能网元根据所述用于指示通过传输层开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息的指示信息,确定所述待监测业务流的监测策略和网络状态信息开放策略,所述监测策略用于确定待监测业务流的监测配置信息,所述监测配置信息用于监测所述待监测业务流的网络状态,所述网络状态信息开放策略用于确定网络状态信息开放规则,所述网络状态信息开放规则用于确定通过传输层开放所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式;所述策略控制功能网元向会话管理网元发送所述监测策略和所述网络状态信息开放策略。
- 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络状态信息开放策略或所述网络状态信息开放规则包括以下一项或多项:用于指示介入所述终端设备与所述应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息、用于指示所述待监测业务流使用的传输层协议的指 示信息、从接入网设备接收所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、检测来自所述终端设备的传输层反馈消息的方式、在所述传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息的方式、或用于指示根据所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息在至少一个数据包中添加拥塞经历CE标记的指示信息,所述传输层能力协商流程包括确定是否支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力的流程。
- 根据权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述策略控制功能网元接收来自所述应用功能网元的用于指示介入所述终端设备与所述应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息。
- 根据权利要求16至18中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述策略控制功能网元接收来自所述应用功能网元的用于指示所述待监测业务流使用的传输层协议的指示信息。
- 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:会话管理网元接收来自策略控制功能网元的待监测业务流的监测策略和网络状态信息开放策略;所述会话管理网元根据所述网络状态信息开放策略向用户面网元发送网络状态信息开放规则,所述网络状态信息开放规则用于确定通过传输层开放所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式;所述会话管理网元根据所述监测策略向所述接入网设备发送待监测业务流的监测配置信息,所述监测配置信息用于监测所述待监测业务流的网络状态。
- 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述网络状态信息开放策略或所述网络状态信息开放规则包括以下一项或多项:用于指示介入所述终端设备与所述应用服务器的传输层能力协商流程的指示信息、用于指示所述待监测业务流使用的传输层协议的指示信息、从接入网设备接收所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、检测来自所述终端设备的传输层反馈消息的方式、在所述传输层反馈消息中添加用于指示所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息的信息的方式、或用于指示根据所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息在至少一个数据包中添加拥塞经历CE标记的指示信息,所述传输层能力协商流程包括确定是否支持通过传输层反馈网络状态信息的能力的流程。
- 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:用户面网元获取待监测业务流的网络状态信息;所述用户面网元根据所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息向终端设备发送所述待监测业务流中的至少一个数据包,所述至少一个数据包中携带拥塞经历CE标记的数据包的数量与所述至少一个数据包的数量的比值用于确定所述待监测业务流的网络状态。
- 根据权利要求22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:所述用户面网元接收来自会话管理网元的网络状态信息开放规则,所述网络状态信息开放规则用于确定开放所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式,所述网络状态信息开放规则包括以下一项或多项:从所述接入网设备接收所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式、或用于指示根据所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息在所述至少一个数据包中添加CE标记的指示信息。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,用于实现如权利要求1至23中任意一项所述的方 法。
- 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器,所述至少一个处理器与至少一个存储器耦合,所述至少一个处理器用于执行所述至少一个存储器中存储的计算机程序或指令,以使所述通信装置执行如权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法。
- 一种芯片,其特征在于,包括处理器和通信接口,所述通信接口用于接收数据和/或信息,并将接收到的数据和/或信息传输至所述处理器,所述处理器处理所述数据和/或信息,以使得执行如权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法。
- 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,其上存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被执行时,以使得计算机执行如权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法。
- 一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,其特征在于,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1至23中任一项所述的方法。
- 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:用户面网元获取待监测业务流的网络状态信息;终端设备向所述用户面网元发送第一传输层反馈消息,所述第一传输层反馈消息与所述待监测业务流中的至少一个数据包对应;所述用户面网元根据所述第一传输层反馈消息向应用服务器发送第二传输层反馈消息,所述第二传输层反馈消息包括用于指示所述待监测业务流的网络状态的信息。
- 一种通信方法,其特征在于,包括:应用服务器向策略控制功能网元发送用于指示通过传输层对外开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息的指示信息;所述策略控制功能网元根据所述用于指示通过传输层开放待监测业务流的网络状态信息的指示信息,确定所述待监测业务流的监测策略和网络状态信息开放策略,所述监测策略用于确定待监测业务流的监测配置信息,所述监测配置信息用于监测所述待监测业务流的网络状态,所述网络状态信息开放策略用于确定网络状态信息开放规则,所述网络状态信息开放规则用于确定通过传输层开放所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式;所述策略控制功能网元向会话管理网元发送所述监测策略和所述网络状态信息开放策略;所述会话管理网元根据所述网络状态信息开放策略向用户面网元发送网络状态信息开放规则,所述网络状态信息开放规则用于确定通过传输层开放所述待监测业务流的网络状态信息的方式;所述会话管理网元根据所述监测策略向所述接入网设备发送待监测业务流的监测配置信息,所述监测配置信息用于监测所述待监测业务流的网络状态。
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN202210454309.2A CN117014951A (zh) | 2022-04-27 | 2022-04-27 | 通信方法及通信装置 |
CN202210454309.2 | 2022-04-27 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2023207970A1 true WO2023207970A1 (zh) | 2023-11-02 |
Family
ID=88517742
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2023/090571 WO2023207970A1 (zh) | 2022-04-27 | 2023-04-25 | 通信方法及通信装置 |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
CN (1) | CN117014951A (zh) |
WO (1) | WO2023207970A1 (zh) |
Families Citing this family (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN117478431B (zh) * | 2023-12-27 | 2024-03-22 | 深圳市智联物联科技有限公司 | 一种基于可信网络的工业物联网控制方法 |
Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
KR20080095063A (ko) * | 2007-04-23 | 2008-10-28 | 에스케이 텔레콤주식회사 | 유무선 통신망의 상태를 고려한 데이터 흐름 제어 방법과이를 위한 전송 제어 장치 |
WO2012171456A1 (zh) * | 2011-06-14 | 2012-12-20 | 华为技术有限公司 | 分流数据到无线局域网的方法、终端及网络设备 |
CN105099803A (zh) * | 2014-05-15 | 2015-11-25 | ***通信集团公司 | 一种流量识别方法、应用服务器及网元设备 |
WO2016039673A1 (en) * | 2014-09-10 | 2016-03-17 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Explicit congestion notification marking of user traffic |
CN110381535A (zh) * | 2018-04-12 | 2019-10-25 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | 传输控制方法及装置 |
CN110915256A (zh) * | 2017-09-21 | 2020-03-24 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | 一种数据分发的方法、设备、存储介质及*** |
-
2022
- 2022-04-27 CN CN202210454309.2A patent/CN117014951A/zh active Pending
-
2023
- 2023-04-25 WO PCT/CN2023/090571 patent/WO2023207970A1/zh unknown
Patent Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
KR20080095063A (ko) * | 2007-04-23 | 2008-10-28 | 에스케이 텔레콤주식회사 | 유무선 통신망의 상태를 고려한 데이터 흐름 제어 방법과이를 위한 전송 제어 장치 |
WO2012171456A1 (zh) * | 2011-06-14 | 2012-12-20 | 华为技术有限公司 | 分流数据到无线局域网的方法、终端及网络设备 |
CN105099803A (zh) * | 2014-05-15 | 2015-11-25 | ***通信集团公司 | 一种流量识别方法、应用服务器及网元设备 |
WO2016039673A1 (en) * | 2014-09-10 | 2016-03-17 | Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) | Explicit congestion notification marking of user traffic |
CN110915256A (zh) * | 2017-09-21 | 2020-03-24 | Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 | 一种数据分发的方法、设备、存储介质及*** |
CN110381535A (zh) * | 2018-04-12 | 2019-10-25 | 中兴通讯股份有限公司 | 传输控制方法及装置 |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN117014951A (zh) | 2023-11-07 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
KR101597013B1 (ko) | 모바일 송수신기, 기지국 송수신기, 데이터 서버, 그리고 관련 장치, 방법 및 컴퓨터 프로그램 | |
WO2020200066A1 (zh) | 获取数据包延迟参数的方法、***和装置 | |
JP7477661B2 (ja) | データ伝送方法および装置 | |
JP2022106756A (ja) | Ranと5gcとの間のqfi調和を提供する方法、ならびに、関連する無線端末、基地局、およびコアネットワークノード | |
CN109842570B (zh) | 聚合速率控制方法、设备以及*** | |
CA3148703A1 (en) | Quality of service information notification method, device, and system | |
WO2020169039A1 (zh) | 一种策略管理的方法及装置 | |
CN111356157A (zh) | 实现网络能力开放的方法及相关设备 | |
EP4156770A1 (en) | Communication method, apparatus and system | |
WO2023207970A1 (zh) | 通信方法及通信装置 | |
US11647419B2 (en) | Adjusting window size based on quality of experience | |
US20240214864A1 (en) | Communication method, apparatus, and system | |
EP4175356A1 (en) | Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device | |
CN115250537A (zh) | 一种通信方法及设备 | |
WO2023071770A1 (zh) | 获取数据分析结果的方法及通信装置 | |
KR102179212B1 (ko) | 제어 정보에 대한 송신 방법 및 장치 | |
CN116436862A (zh) | 一种通信方法及通信装置 | |
WO2023174100A1 (zh) | 通信方法及通信装置 | |
CN117528629A (zh) | 通信方法、装置及*** | |
WO2023185608A1 (zh) | 一种数据传输的方法及通信装置 | |
WO2022213848A1 (zh) | 一种通信方法及设备 | |
US20240121201A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus | |
WO2024032211A1 (zh) | 一种拥塞控制方法以及装置 | |
US20240237087A1 (en) | Method and apparatus on media adaptation in mobile communication systems supporting media-aware packet handling | |
WO2024156140A1 (en) | Systems and methods for determining network capability via user plane |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 23795402 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |